Siemens G130 List Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Siemens Manuals
  4. Control Unit
  5. SINAMICS G130
  6. List manual

Siemens G130 List Manual

Hide thumbs Also See for G130:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Table Of Contents
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

See also: Function Manual , Manual
s
SINAMICS
SINAMICS G130/G150
List Manual
Edition
07/2016

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading

Related Manuals for Siemens G130

Summary of Contents for Siemens G130

  • Page 1 SINAMICS SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual Edition 07/2016...

  • Page 3: Function Diagrams

    Preface Fundamental safety instructions SINAMICS Parameters SINAMICS G130/G150 Function diagrams Faults and alarms List Manual Appendix Index Valid for Drive Firmware version SINAMICS 07/2016 A5E03263479A...
  • Page 4 Note the following: WARNING Siemens products are only permitted to be used for the applications listed in the catalog and in the associated technical documentation. If third-party products and components are used, then they must be recommended or approved by Siemens. These products can only function correctly and safely if they are transported, stored, set up, mounted, installed, commissioned, operated and maintained correctly.
  • Page 5 Information on how to produce individual contents for your own machine documentation based on Siemens contents is available under the link: http://www.siemens.com/mdm Training Information about SITRAIN (Siemens Training on products, systems and solutions for automation) is available under the following link: http://www.siemens.com/sitrain FAQs You can find Frequently Asked Questions in the Service&Support pages under Product...

  • Page 6: Faults And Alarms

    SIZER Engineering Tool Configuration Manuals, Motors Deciding/ordering SINAMICS G Catalogs • SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions Installation/assembly • SINAMICS G130 Operating Instructions • STARTER Commissioning Tool Commissioning • SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions • SINAMICS G130 Operating Instructions • SINAMICS G150 Operating Instructions Usage/operation •...

  • Page 7: Sinamics G130/G150 List Manual (Lh2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A

    – Table of contents for function diagrams (Page 1093) 2. List of abbreviations (Page 1945) 3. References (Page 1954) 4. Index (Page 1961) Technical Support Country-specific telephone numbers for technical support are provided on the Internet at: http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 8 Preface SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...

  • Page 9: Table Of Contents

    Vector control ............1240 SINAMICS G130/G150...
  • Page 10 Index ................1961 SINAMICS G130/G150...

  • Page 11: Fundamental Safety

    Fundamental safety instructions Content General safety instructions Industrial security SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...

  • Page 12: Parameters

    Machines can malfunction as a result of incorrect or changed parameter assignment, which in turn can lead to injuries or death. • Protect the parameterization (parameter assignments) against unauthorized access. • Respond to possible malfunctions by applying suitable measures (e.g. EMERGENCY-STOP or EMERGENCY-OFF). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...

  • Page 13: Industrial Security

    Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the secure operation of plants, solutions, machines, devices, and/or networks. They are important components in a holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, Siemens products and solutions undergo continuous development. Siemens recommends strongly that you regularly check for product updates.
  • Page 14 1 Fundamental safety instructions 1.2 Industrial security SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...

  • Page 15: Parameters

    Parameters Content Overview of parameters List of parameters Parameters for data sets 1069 Parameters for write protection and know-how protection 1086 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...

  • Page 16: Overview Of Parameters

    - - - - - - - - - - - - End of example - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - The individual pieces of information are described in detail below. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 17 • Restoring the factory settings p0970 The following applies to display parameters: The fields "Min", "Max" and "Factory setting" are specified with a dash "-" and the relevant unit in square brackets. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 18 • p1055 BI: Jog bit 0 VECTOR The parameter is available with the VECTOR drive object, regardless of which function modules have been activated (i.e. it is available with every activated function module belonging to the drive object). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 19 Basic Infeed with "PROFINET CBE20" function module (r0108.31). CU_G130_DP SINAMICS G130 Control Unit with PROFIBUS interface. CU_G130_DP (CAN) SINAMICS G130 Control Unit with PROFIBUS interface and "CAN" function module (p0108.29). CU_G130_DP SINAMICS G130 Control Unit with PROFIBUS interface and "COMM BOARD"...
  • Page 20 VECTOR_G (Rec) Vector drive for SINAMICS G130/G150 with "Recorder" function module (r0108.5). VECTOR_G (J_estimator) Vector drive for SINAMICS G130/G150 with "Moment of inertia estimator" function module (r0108.10). VECTOR_G (Safety red) Vector drive for SINAMICS G130/G150 with "Safety rotary axis" function module (r0108.13).
  • Page 21 The pulses are not enabled and the state "C1(x)" or "C2(x)" is not active. Note Parameter p0009 is CU-specific (belongs to the Control Unit). Parameter p0010 is drive-specific (belongs to each drive object). The operating state of individual drive objects is displayed in r0002. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 22 • 4: Service Parameters with this access level are password protected. Note Parameter p0003 is CU-specific (belongs to the Control Unit). A higher access level will also include the functions of the lower levels. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 23 – – BO: Integer32 – – – BO: FloatingPoint32 – – – – Legend: BICO interconnection permitted –: BICO interconnection not permitted rxxxx: BICO interconnection is only permitted for the specified CO parameters SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 24 "Unit selection" determine the group to which this parameter belongs and with which parameter the unit can be changed over. Example: Unit group: 7_1, unit selection: p0505 The parameter belongs to unit group 7_1 and the unit can be changed over using p0505. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 25 Unit group Unit selection for p0349 = Reference variable for % 15_1 ⋅ 1000 p0304 ---------------------------------------------------------------- - 2 π ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ ⋅ 3 p0305 p0310 16_1 p0304 --------------------------- - ⋅ 3 p0305 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 26 (infeed) 14_8 r2004 (drive) 14_9 14_10 14_11 r2004 14_12 kvar kvar r2004 17_1 Nms/rad lbf ft s/rad p2003/p2000 18_1 p2001/p2002 19_1 p2002/p2001 21_1 °C °C °F °F 21_2 °F °F 22_1 ft/s ft/s SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 27 The setting of these parameters is determined by the operating environment of the Control Unit (e.g. depending on converter type, macro, power unit). Note For SINAMICS G130/G150, the macros and their settings are provided in the following documentation: References: /BAx/ x = 1, 2...
  • Page 28 (e.g. description of functions). Moreover, no support is provided for these parameters by "Technical Support" (hotline). Description Explanation of the function of a parameter Values Lists the possible values of a parameter. Recommendation Information about recommended settings. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...

  • Page 29: Safety Instructions

    The description of this safety instruction can be found at the beginning of this manual, see "Legal information" (Page 4). Caution The description of this safety instruction can be found at the beginning of this manual, see "Legal information" (Page 4). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 30 2.1 Overview of parameters Notice The description of this safety instruction can be found at the beginning of this manual, see "Legal information" (Page 4). Note Information that the user may find useful. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...

  • Page 31: Number Ranges Of Parameters

    Communication (fieldbus) 2100 2139 Faults and alarms 2140 2199 Signals and monitoring 2200 2359 Technology controller 2360 2399 Staging, hibernation 2500 2699 Position control (LR) and basic positioning (EPOS) 2700 2719 Reference values, display SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 32 NVRAM, system parameters 7800 7839 EEPROM read/write parameters 7840 8399 Internal system parameters 8400 8449 Real-time clock (RTC) 8500 8599 Data and macro management 8600 8799 CAN bus 8800 8899 Communication Board Ethernet (CBE), PROFIdrive SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 33 Safety Integrated 11000 11299 Free technology controller 0, 1, 2 20000 20999 Free function blocks (FBLOCKS) 21000 25999 Drive Control Chart (DCC) 50000 53999 SINAMICS DC MASTER (closed-loop DC current control) 61000 61001 PROFINET SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...

  • Page 34: List Of Parameters

    2 Parameters 2.2 List of parameters List of parameters Product: SINAMICS G130/G150, Version: 4806000, Language: eng Objects: CU_G130_PN, CU_G150_PN, CU_G130_DP, CU_G150_DP, VECTOR_G, B_INF, TM31, TM120, TM150, TB30, TM54F_MA, TM54F_SL, ENC, r0002 Control Unit operating display / CU op_display CU_G130_PN, Can be changed: -...
  • Page 35 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Operating display for Terminal Module 120 (TM120) Value: Module in cyclic operation Module not in cyclic operation Alarm Fault Initialization 120: Module deactivated SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 36 Module not in cyclic operation Fault Initialization Reset active 120: Module deactivated 200: Wait for run-up 250: Device signals a topology error Notice: For several missing enable signals, the corresponding value with the highest number is displayed. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 37 Module not in cyclic operation Alarm Fault Initialization 120: Module deactivated 200: Wait for booting/partial booting 250: Device signals a topology error Notice: For several missing enable signals, the corresponding value with the highest number is displayed. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 38 Motor identification Communication Faults, alarms, monitoring functions Position control Free function blocks Trace and function generator Technology Extensions Topology Safety Integrated Command Data Sets (CDS) Drive Data Sets (DDS) Dependency: Refer to: p0003 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 39 Value: p0005 Dependency: Refer to: p0005 Note: Mode 0 ... 3 can only be selected if also r0020, r0021 are available on the drive object. Mode 4 is available for all drive objects. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 40 Sets the device and basic drive commissioning. By appropriately setting this parameter, those parameters are filtered that can be written into in the various commissioning steps. Value: Ready Device configuration Defining the drive type/function module SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 41 = 113: Change drive object number This state allows the drive object number of existing drive objects to be changed using p9913 after the device has been commissioned for the first time. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 42 Motor commissioning Encoder commissioning Technological application/units Data sets Basic positioner commissioning Position control commissioning Only Siemens int Parameter reset Safety Integrated commissioning 10000: Ready with immediate feedback signal Notice: For p0010 = 10000 the following applies: After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made and the status is shown in r3996.
  • Page 43 Setting this parameter filters out the parameters that can be written into in the various commissioning steps. For the BOP, this setting also causes the read access operations to be filtered. Value: Ready Only Siemens int Parameter reset Dependency: Refer to: p0970...
  • Page 44 Setting this parameter filters out the parameters that can be written into in the various commissioning steps. For the BOP, this setting also causes the read access operations to be filtered. Value: Ready Only Siemens int Parameter reset Dependency: Refer to: p0970 Note: Procedure for "Reset parameter": Set p0010 to 30 and p0970 to 1.
  • Page 45 - p0003, p0009, p0011, p0012, p0976 cannot, for the drive object Control Unit, be included in the user-defined list. - the user-defined list can be cleared and deactivated "restore factory setting". A value of 0 means: Entry is empty. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 46 If p0016 = 1, then it is only possible to access parameters in the parameter list (p0013). Value: BOP user-defined list deactivated BOP user-defined list activated Dependency: Refer to: p0011, p0012, p0013 Note: The user-defined list can only be deactivated with p0011 = p0012 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 47 - [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm] Description: Displays the smoothed actual value of the motor speed. Frequency components from the slip compensation (for induction motors) are not included. Dependency: Refer to: r0022, r0063 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 48 Smoothing time constant = 100 ms The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity. The output voltage is available smoothed (r0025) and unsmoothed (r0072). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 49 SERVO: Smoothing time constant = 100 ms The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity. The absolute current actual value is available smoothed (r0027) and unsmoothed (r0068). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 50 VECTOR: Smoothing time constant = 300 ms The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity. The field-generating current actual value is available smoothed (r0029) and unsmoothed (r0076). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 51 The active power is available smoothed (r0032 with 100 ms, r0082[1] with p0045) and unsmoothed (r0082[0]). For VECTOR and VECTORMV, the following applies: The active power is available smoothed (r0032 with 100 ms) and unsmoothed (r0082). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 52 - Actual torque limit = - M_max lower effective (r1539) For the actual torque limit = 0, the following applies: r0033 = 100 % For the actual torque limit < 0, the following applies: r0033 = 0 % SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 53 - this temperature display is not valid (temperature sensor error). - a PTC sensor or bimetallic NC contact is connected. - the temperature sensor of the synchronous motor is deactivated (p0600 = 0 or p0601 = 0). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 54 Index: [0] = Actual measured value [1] = Maximum measured value Dependency: Refer to: A01009 Notice: Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Note: The value of -200 indicates that there is no measuring signal. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 55 [17] = Depletion layer 5 [18] = Depletion layer 6 [19] = Cooling unit liquid intake Notice: Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Note: The value of -200 indicates that there is no measuring signal. r0037[0]: Maximum value of the inverter temperatures (r0037[5...10]).
  • Page 56 Display and connector output for the energy values at the output terminals of the power unit. Index: [0] = Energy balance (sum) [1] = Energy drawn [2] = Energy fed back Dependency: Refer to: p0043 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 57 Armature short-circuit / DC braking enable missing STOP2 enable missing Safety enable missing Infeed enable missing Ramp-function generator enable missing Ramp-function generator start missing Setpoint enable missing QuickStop enable missing OFF1 enable internal missing OFF2 enable internal missing SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 58 - OFF3 has still not been completed or an OFF3 fault response is present. Bit 19 = 1 (internal pulse enable missing), if: - synchronization is running between the basic clock cycle, DRIVE-CLiQ clock cycle and application clock cycle. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 59 Bit 16 = 1 (enable signal missing), if: - there is an OFF1 fault response. The system is only enabled if the fault is removed and was acknowledged and the "switching-on inhibited" withdrawn with OFF1 = 0. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 60 [2] = Encoder 2 Encoder Data Set EDS effective [3] = Encoder 3 Encoder Data Set EDS effective Dependency: Refer to: p0186, p0187, p0188, p0189, r0838 Note: Value 99 means the following: No encoder assigned (not configured). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 61 Pulse enable available Soft starting present Magnetizing completed Voltage boost when starting Active Inactive 6301 Acceleration voltage Active Inactive 6301 Frequency negative 6719 Field weakening active Voltage limit active 6714 Slip limit active 6310 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 62 Factory setting - [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm] Description: Displays the unsmoothed actual speed values sensed by the encoders. Note: The speed actual value within a PROFIBUS cycle (r2064[1]) is averaged and displayed. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 63 The actual speed (r0063[0]) is available as a display quantity with additional smoothing in r0021. For U/f control, the mechanical speed calculated from the output frequency and the slip is shown in r0063[2] even if slip compensation is deactivated. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 64 Display and connector output for the maximum output current of the power unit. Dependency: The maximum output current is determined by the parameterized current limit and the motor and converter thermal protection. Refer to: p0290, p0640 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 65 In indices 3 ... 5, the offset currents of the 3 phases, which are added to correct the phase currents, are displayed. The sum of the 3 corrected phase currents is displayed in index 6. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 66 - [Vrms] Description: Display and connector output for the actual output voltage of the power unit (Motor Module). Dependency: Refer to: r0025 Note: The output voltage is available smoothed (r0025) and unsmoothed (r0072). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 67 Display and connector output for the field-generating current actual value (Id_act). Dependency: Refer to: r0029 Note: This value is irrelevant for the U/f control mode. The field-generating current actual value is available smoothed (r0029) and unsmoothed (r0076). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 68 Display and connector output for actual torque value. Index: [0] = Unsmoothed [1] = Smoothed with p0045 Dependency: Refer to: r0031, p0045 Note: The value is available smoothed (r0031 with 100 ms, r0080[1] with p0045) and unsmoothed (r0080[0]). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 69 Func. diagram: - P-Group: Displays, signals Unit group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Factory setting - [%] - [%] - [%] Description: Displays the flux setpoint. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 70 - [V] - [V] Description: Displays the actual phase voltage. Index: [0] = Phase U [1] = Phase V [2] = Phase W Note: The values are determined from the transistor switch-on duration. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 71 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2005 Expert list: 1 Factory setting - [°] - [°] - [°] Description: Displays the transformation angle. Dependency: Refer to: p0431, r1778 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 72 = number of encoders (or the line supply voltage sensing for Active Line Modules) e = number of additional encoders (or the line supply voltage sensing for Active Line Modules) f = number of Terminal Modules g = number of Terminal Boards h = reserved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 73 Refer to: r0206, p0210, p0300, p0304, p0305, p0307, p0308, p0309, p0310, p0311, p0314, p0320, p0322, p0323, p0335, r0336, r0337, p1800 Note: The parameter can only be changed for vector control (p0107). The parameter value is not reset when the factory setting is restored (p0010 = 30, p0970). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 74 Application-specific view (p0103) yyy: Type of drive object (p0107) Example: PD052011.ACX --> "011" stands for the drive object, type SERVO --> "052" is the number of the view for this drive object SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 75 If a component has been deactivated, only the component with the correct serial number may be inserted, or none at all. If value = 1: All components of the drive object must be available for error-free operation. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 76 Setting to activate/deactivate a drive object. Value: Deactivate drive object Activate drive object Drive object deactivate and not present Recommendation: After inserting all of the components of a drive object, before activating, first wait for Alarm A01316. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 77 DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module 200: TM31 (Terminal Module) 205: TM54F - Master (Terminal Module) 206: TM54F - Slave (Terminal Module) 207: TM120 (Terminal Module) 208: TM150 (Terminal Module) 300: ENCODER Dependency: Refer to: p0103, r0103 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 78 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Displays the type of each drive object. Value: BASIC INFEED CONTROL Dependency: Refer to: p0103, r0103 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 79 Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Displays the type of each drive object. Value: 100: TB30 (Terminal Board) Dependency: Refer to: p0103, r0103 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 80 Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Displays the type of each drive object. Value: 150: DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module Dependency: Refer to: p0103, r0103 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 81 Active messages can prevent or influence activating a function module. Refer to: p0171, r0171, p0172, r0172, p0173, r0173 Refer to: A07089, F13010 Note: A "function module" is a functional expansion of a drive object that can be activated when commissioning. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 82 The following bits are only automatically set, if the power units are detected with the appropriate properties. Bit 16: Parallel connection of the same power units (only automatically set for G130/G150). Bit 20: Software gating unit (only automatically set when power units are connected in parallel).
  • Page 83 Unit selection: - CU_G150_DP, Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 VECTOR_G, B_INF Factory setting Description: Displays the selected basic sampling time for this drive object. Dependency: Refer to: r0110 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 84 If, for a servo drive, p112 = 5 is set, then the pulse frequency p1800 is pre-assigned 8 kHz. For D410-2 and vector drive, the current controller sampling time can only be permanently changed for p0112 = 0. Refer to: p0092 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 85 When changing the sampling times of the current and speed controllers (also refer to p0115), then we recommend that after exiting commissioning (p0009 = 0) the controller settings are re-calculated using p0340 = 4. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 86 The maximum pulse frequency of the power units was already taken into account in r0114. A value of 0 kHz does not define a recommended pulse frequency. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 87 = 1, the current controller sampling time is not an integral multiple of 125 µs or if p0112 is set > 1. For p0092 = 0, the check with p0112 = 0 (= expert) can be deactivated. Refer to: r0110, r0111, p0112 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 88 If sampling times in p0115 are individually changed for p0112 = 0 (expert) then it must always be observed that the selected sampling times of the setpoint channel (p0115[3]), position controller (p0115[4]), positioning (p0115[5]) and technology controller (p0115[6]) are always greater than or equal to twice the current controller sampling time (p0115[0]). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 89 Recommended value, which after changing other clock cycles on the DRIVE-CLiQ line, would result in an operational system. Index: [0] = Change only for the actual drive object [1] = Changing all objects on the DRIVE-CLiQ line Dependency: Refer to: p0115 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 90 For p0118 <= 0.005 µs, the current controller output is delayed by a complete current controller clock cycle (p0115[0]). After p0118 has been changed, we recommend that the current controller is adapted (p1715). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 91 Note: While p0124 = 1, the READY LED flashes green/orange or red/orange with 2 Hz at the appropriate power unit. For parallel circuit configurations, the parameter index is assigned to a power unit. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 92 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Displays the "active/inactive" state of a power unit component. Value: Component inactive Component active Dependency: Refer to: p0105, p0125, p0897 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 93 The motor data set is assigned to a motor using this parameter. This unique component number is assigned when parameterizing the topology. Only component numbers can be entered into this parameter that correspond to a motor. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 94 Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Sets the number of Encoder Data Sets (EDS). Note: When parameterizing the drive with "no encoder" there must be at least one encoder data set (p0140 >= 1). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 95 Factory setting Description: Detects the Sensor Module assigned to this drive and data set. Note: While p0144 = 1, the READY LED flashes green/orange or red/orange with 2 Hz at the appropriate Sensor Module. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 96 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Displays the version of the EEPROM data of the Sensor Module. Dependency: Refer to: r0127, r0157 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 97 Sets the component number for the Terminal Module. This unique component number is assigned when parameterizing the topology. Only component numbers can be entered into this parameter that correspond to a Terminal Module. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 98 Setting to activate/deactivate a Voltage Sensing Module (VSM). Value: Deactivate component Activate component Component deactivate and not present Recommendation: After inserting a component, before activating, first wait for Alarm A01317. Dependency: Refer to: r0156 Refer to: A01314, A01317 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 99 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Displays the version of the EEPROM data for the DRIVE-CLiQ Hub Module. Note: Example: The value 1010100 should be interpreted as V01.01.01.00. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 100 Sets the component number for the option board (e.g. Terminal Board 30). This unique component number is assigned when parameterizing the topology. Only component numbers can be entered into this parameter that correspond to an option board. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 101 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 Bit 16 Bit 17 Bit 18 Bit 19 Bit 20 Bit 21 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 102 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 Bit 16 Bit 17 Bit 18 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 103 0 signal Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 104 Factory setting Description: Using the parameter, each Drive Data Set (= index) is assigned the associated Motor Data Set (MDS). The parameter value therefore corresponds to the number of the assigned motor data set. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 105 Displays the properties supported by the power unit firmware. Bit field: Signal name 1 signal 0 signal Edge modulation possible Free telegram can be selected Smart mode possible for Active Line Module Yes Safety Integrated possible for VECTOR Thermal model expanded SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 106 DC link voltage - as to whether the short-circuit is activated. For bit 23: The component supports the detection of current actual values (and the detection of valve close durations) with double clocking and phase shift. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 107 Part of the target topology No only act topo Alarm present Safety message present Fault present Alarm class bit 0 High Alarm class bit 1 High Maintenance required Maintenance urgently required Fault gone/can be acknowledged SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 108 BIOS version r0198[1]: EEPROM data version EEPROM 0 r0198[2]: EEPROM data version EEPROM 1 Dependency: Refer to: r0018, r0128, r0148, r0158, r0197 Note: Example: The value 1010100 should be interpreted as V01.01.01.00. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 109 Factory setting 65535 Description: Sets the actual code number from r0200 to acknowledge the power unit being used. When commissioned for the first time, the code number is automatically transferred from r0200 into p0201. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 110 SINAMICS G120C 135: SINAMICS PMV40 136: SINAMICS PMV60 137: SINAMICS PMV80 138: SINAMICS G110M 150: SINAMICS G 151: PM330 (SINAMICS G120) 200: SINAMICS GM 250: SINAMICS SM 260: SINAMICS MC 300: SINAMICS GL SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 111 Different cooling type supported Safe Brake Control (SBC) supported Safety Integrated supported Internal LC output filter Line voltage 1-phase 3-phase Note: For parallel circuit configurations, the parameter index is assigned to a power unit. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 112 Index: [0] = Rated value [1] = Load duty cycle with low overload [2] = Load duty cycle with high overload [3] = S1 cont duty cyc [4] = S6 load duty cycle SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 113 [0] = Catalog [1] = Load duty cycle with low overload [2] = Load duty cycle with high overload [3] = S1 load duty cycle [4] = S6 load duty cycle Dependency: Refer to: p0205 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 114 Sets the drive unit supply voltage (3-ph. AC). The value corresponds to the rms value of the phase-to-phase rated line supply voltage. Dependency: The parameter can be reduced to p0210 = 70 V if p0212.0 is set. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 115 For bit 01 = 1: There is external precharging of the DC/AC Motor Modules. The precharging monitoring is calculated. For bit 03 = 0: The DC link voltage limit is calculated from p0210. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 116 The status of the inputs/outputs for the power unit contactors is displayed in r0256. This only applies to chassis power units with 3 AC line connection and line contactors. The status display is only effective after parameter save and POWER ON. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 117 Sets the type of the filter at the motor side. Value: No filter Motor reactor dv/dt filter Sine-wave filter Siemens Sine-wave filter third-party Dependency: The following parameters are influenced using p0230: p0230 = 1: --> p0233 (power unit, motor reactor) = filter inductance...
  • Page 118 Description: Enter the inductance of a filter connected at the power unit output. Dependency: This parameter is automatically pre-set when you select a filter via p0230 if a SIEMENS filter is defined for the power unit. Refer to: p0230 Note: When exiting the quick commissioning using p3900 = 1, the parameter value is set to the value of the defined SIEMENS filter or to zero.
  • Page 119 Description: Enters the capacitance of a sine-wave filter connected at the power unit output. Dependency: This parameter is automatically pre-set when you select a filter via p0230 if a SIEMENS filter is defined for the power unit. Refer to: p0230 Note: The parameter value includes the sum of all of the capacitances of a phase connected in series (phase - ground).
  • Page 120 Sets the maximum operating time of the power unit fan. The prealarm (warning) is output 500 hours before this set value. The monitoring is deactivated with p0252 = 0. Dependency: Refer to: p0251 Refer to: A30042 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 121 For power unit firmware version less than 4.6, the following applies: There are no separate monitoring times for the delay time between opening and closing. In this case, the maximum of the opening time and closing time is effective. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 122 PDS5 bypass contactor control output High PDS5 bypass contactor feedback signal High input PDS6 precharging/line contactor control High output PDS6 precharging/line contactor feedback High signal input PDS6 bypass contactor control output High SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 123 The fault is only output if, during operation, the conductivity exceeds the permissible fault value and the value remains for a longer time than is set in this parameter. Dependency: Refer to: F49151, A49171 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 124 [3] = Cooling unit no fault present [4] = Cooling unit no leaked liquid [5] = Cooling unit liquid flow OK [6] = Cooling unit conductivity < fault threshold [7] = Cooling unit conductivity < alarm threshold SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 125 The value represents an offset so that the alarm threshold is obtained from the total of r0296 and p0279. Dependency: Refer to: p0210, r0296 Refer to: A06810 Note: The absolute value of the undervoltage threshold r0296 depends on the selected unit supply voltage (p0210). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 126 No reduction shutdown when overload threshold is reached Reduce the pulse frequency and output current Reduce the pulse frequency Automatic output current reduction Automatic pulse frequency and output current reduction Automatic pulse frequency reduction SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 127 When the threshold value is exceeded, only an overload alarm is output. Dependency: Refer to: r0036, p0290 Refer to: A07805 Note: The I2t fault threshold is 100 %. If this value is exceeded, fault F30005 is output. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 128 If the DC link voltage falls below this threshold, the drive unit is tripped due to a DC link undervoltage condition. Dependency: Refer to: F30003 Note: The value depends on the device type and the selected device rated voltage (p0210). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 129 1LA7 induction motor (not a code number) 1xx8 SIMOTICS TN induction motor (not a code number) 1LA9 induction motor (not a code number) 100: 1LE1 induction motor 101: 1PC1 induction motor 102: 1PH2 induction motor SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 130 (write protection). The write protection is canceled if the motor type p0300 is set to a non-Siemens motor that matches p0301 (e.g. p0300 = 2 for p0301 = 2xxxx). Write protection is automatically canceled when the results of motor data identification are copied to the motor parameters.
  • Page 131 Motor parameter sensing takes place in the following events if the SMI is connected to the Motor Module and the encoder is activated (p0145): - Warm restart - downloading projects. - POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on). - where p0300 = 10000, 10001. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 132 - masses/moments of inertia: p0341, p0344 All other parameters take into account the replacement/equivalent motor (e.g. r0331, r0333). Recommendation: For motors connected in parallel, external thermal protection should be provided for each individual motor. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 133 For separately excited synchronous motors (p0300 = 5) negative values for the power factor are interpreted as overexcitation. For all other motor types, the sign is ignored. Note: The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 134 If p0311 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), the maximum speed p1082, which is also associated with quick commissioning, is pre-assigned accordingly. This is not the case when commissioning the motor (p0010 = SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 135 When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. Note: This parameter is not used for induction motors (p0300 = 1xx). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 136 If p0322 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), the maximum speed p1082, which is also associated with quick commissioning, is pre-assigned accordingly. This is not the case when commissioning the motor (p0010 = Note: The parameter has no significance for a value of p0322 = 0. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 137 The value is automatically pre-assigned for the following events: - For p0325 = 0 and automatic calculation of the closed-loop control parameters (p0340 = 1, 2, 3). - for quick commissioning (p3900 = 1, 2, 3). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 138 Refer to: p0325, p1980, p1982, r1984, r1985, r1987, p1990 Notice: When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 139 For p0309 > 0, this value is converted into the power factor and displayed. Dependency: If p0308 is not entered, the parameter is calculated from the rating plate parameters. Note: The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 140 1LA1 and 1LA8 motors are characterized by the fact that they have an internal rotor fan. This "internal cooling" lies within the motor frame and is not visible. Air is not directly exchanged with the motor ambient air. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 141 Setting to automatically calculate motor parameters and U/f open-loop and closed-loop control parameters from the rating plate data. Value: No calculation Complete calculation Calculation of equivalent circuit diagram parameters Calculation of closed-loop control parameters Calculation of controller parameters Calculation of technological limits and threshold values SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 142 Note: The calculation is not performed, if the power unit is deactivated. p0340 = 1 contains the calculations of p0340 = 2, 3, 4, 5 without overwriting the motor parameters from the Siemens motor lists (p0301 > 0). p0340 = 2 calculates the motor parameters (p0350 ... p0360), but only if it does not involve a Siemens catalog motor (p0301 = 0).
  • Page 143 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: PMSM, SESM, REL, Scaling: - Expert list: 1 RESM Factory setting 0.00 [Arms] 10000.00 [Arms] 0.00 [Arms] Description: Displays the identified rated motor current. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 144 This is the case if the current limit is reached while building up magnetizing. For induction motors, the parameter cannot be set to 0 s (internal limit: 0.1 * r0384). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 145 When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. Note: The motor identification routine determines the stator resistance from the total stator resistance minus the cable resistance (p0352). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 146 When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. Note: The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 147 Note: The parameter is not used for separately excited synchronous motors (p0300 = 5). For permanent-magnet synchronous motors (p0300 = 2), this is the non-saturated value and is ideal for a low current. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 148 When selecting a catalog motor (p0301), this parameter is automatically pre-assigned and is write protected. Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. Note: The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 149 With permanent-magnet synchronous motors, p0362 = 100 % corresponds to the product of the unsaturated quadrature inductance (p0356) and the rated motor current (p0305). When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been selected (p0300). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 150 The saturation characteristic describes the mapping of the stator quadrature axis current onto the stator quadrature axis flux. The parameter sets the third stator quadrature axis flux as a [%] referred to the product of the unsaturated quadrature inductance (p0356) and the rated motor current. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 151 With permanent-magnet synchronous motors, p0362 = 100 % corresponds to the product of the unsaturated quadrature inductance (p0356) and the rated motor current (p0305). When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been selected (p0300). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 152 If the parameters are not set as specified, i.e. not in ascending order and to more than 20 %, the unsaturated quadrature inductance (p0356) is always used for quadrature axis flux calculation purposes. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 153 The following applies for the magnetizing currents: p0366 < p0367 < p0368 < p0369 The following applies for the stator quadrature axis current values (PESM): 20 % < p0366 < p0367 < p0368 < p0369 Refer to: p0365 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 154 Displays the rotor/secondary section resistance of the motor for the ambient temperature p0625. For separately excited synchronous motors: Displays the damping resistance in the rotor direction (d-axis). Dependency: Refer to: p0625 Note: The parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 155 Displays the stator longitudinal inductance of the synchronous motor including the series inductance (p0353) and the motor reactor (p0233). Note: The parameter is not used for separately excited synchronous motors (p0300 = 5). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 156 Scaling: - Expert list: 1 RESM Factory setting - [mH] - [mH] - [mH] Description: Displays the saturated magnetizing inductance of a separately excited synchronous motor quadrature to the rotor direction (q axis). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 157 The value is calculated from the total of all leakage inductances (p0233, p0356, p0359) divided by the total of all motor resistances (p0350, p0352, p0355). The temperature adaptation of the resistances is not taken into account. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 158 Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. Note: When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been selected (p0300). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 159 In each case, only the rotor resistance of the active Motor Data Set is included with the rotor temperature of the thermal motor model. This parameter is not used for synchronous motors (p0300 = 2xx). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 160 Selects the encoder from the list of encoder types supported. Value: No encoder 3001: 1024 HTL A/B R 3002: 1024 TTL A/B R 3003: 2048 HTL A/B R 3005: 1024 HTL A/B 3006: 1024 TTL A/B 3007: 2048 HTL A/B SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 161 2052: 32, 1 Vpp, A/B, EnDat, Multiturn 4096 2053: 512, 1 Vpp, A/B, EnDat, Multiturn 4096 2054: 16, 1 Vpp, A/B, EnDat, Multiturn 4096 2055: 2048, 1 Vpp, A/B, EnDat, Singleturn 2081: 2048, 1 Vpp, A/B, SSI, Singleturn SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 162 Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting 10100 9999 Description: Selects the gearbox type to pre-set the inversion and the gearbox factor. Measuring gear factor = motor or load revolutions / encoder revolutions. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 163 If an SSI encoder (bit 9 = 1) is used as motor encoder for permanent-magnet synchronous motors, then this is only permissible in conjunction with an additional A/B track (bit 3 = 1 or bit 4 = 1). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 164 Track A/B sq-wave Track A/B sine Track C/D Hall sensor EnDat encoder SSI encoder DRIVE-CLiQ encoder Digital encoder Equidistant zero mark Irregular zero mark Distance-coded zero mark Commutation with zero mark (not ASM) Acceleration SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 165 Bit field: Signal name 1 signal 0 signal Signal Bipolar Unipolar Level Track monitoring A/B <> -A/B None Zero pulse Same as A/B track 24 V unipolar Switching threshold High Pulse/direction Active Inactive SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 166 The number of pole pairs for a resolver is entered here. This value does not always correspond to the pulse number of the measuring device. For a DRIVE-CLiQ encoder, a value is entered here that facilitates optimum transfer of the resolution (p0423). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 167 If position tracking is activated for incremental encoders, only the position actual value is stored. Axis or encoder motion is not detected when deactivated! Any tolerance window entered in p0413 has no effect. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 168 Quarter of the encoder range = (p0408 * p0421) / 4 It is possible that the tolerance window may not be able to be precisely set due to the data type (floating point number with 23 bit mantissa). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 169 Sets the comparison algorithm for the encoder position monitoring functions. Value: SMx20 safety algorithm DQL binary safety algorithm DQL linear non-binary safety algorithm SMC30 safety algorithm 255: Safety algorithm unknown Dependency: Refer to: p9541 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 170 This parameter is automatically preassigned for encoders from the encoder list and for identify encoder (p0400). When selecting a catalog encoder, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0400 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 171 This parameter is automatically preassigned for encoders from the encoder list and for identify encoder (p0400). When selecting a catalog encoder, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0400 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 172 Sets the configuration for an SSI encoder. Bit field: Signal name 1 signal 0 signal Transfer code Binary code Gray code Transfer absolute value twice Data line during the monoflop time High level Low level SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 173 - if bit = 0, the encoder power supply is not switched off on parking, it is reduced from 24 V to 5 V. For bit 27 (extrapolate position values): - if bit = 1, the extrapolation of the position values is activated. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 174 - if bit = 1, the encoder power supply is switched off on parking (0 V). - if bit = 0, the encoder power supply is not switched off on parking, it is reduced from 24 V to 5 V. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 175 The gearbox factor specifies the ratio between the encoder shaft and motor shaft (for motor encoders) or between the encoder shaft and the load. Dependency: This parameter can only be set for p0402 = 9999. Refer to: p0402, p0410, p0433 Note: Negative gearbox factors should be implemented with p0410. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 176 The bit may only be positioned before (p0446) or after (p0448) the absolute value in the SSI protocol. Note: Value = dcba ba: Position of the alarm bit in protocol (0 ... 63). c: Level (0: Low level, 1: High level). d: State of the evaluation (0: Off, 1: On). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 177 Support absolute position for incremental 4750 encoder Deselect monitoring multiturn representation in Gx_XIST2 Deselect track monitoring EnDat linear encoder monitoring incremental/absolute EnDat encoder initialization with high accuracy Analog unipolar track monitoring Dependency: Refer to: p0430, r0459 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 178 F31151, F32151, or F33151 is output. For bit 31: When monitoring is active, the levels of the individual track signals and the corresponding inverted track signals are monitored separately. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 179 When the bit is not set, the incorrect pulses that have occurred up until now are accumulated in p4688. When the bit is not set, p4688 indicates the incorrect pulses that have still not been corrected. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 180 For p0440[0] = 1, the serial number of the encoder belonging EDS0 is copied to p0441[0] ... p0445[0]. Value: No action Transfer serial number Dependency: Refer to: p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445, r0460, r0461, r0462, r0463, r0464, p1990 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 181 Serial number part 4 of the encoder for the commissioning. Dependency: Refer to: p0440, p0441, p0442, p0443, p0445, r0460, r0461, r0462, r0463, r0464 Note: A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 182 When selecting a catalog encoder, this parameter cannot be changed (write protection). Information in p0400 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. Note: For example, error bit, alarm bit or parity bit can be positioned at these bits. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 183 Displays the effective filter time for a squarewave encoder. The filter time is set using p0438. Dependency: Refer to: p0438 Note: A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 184 A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present. For bit 20, 21 (voltage level 5 V, voltage level 24 V): The voltage level cannot be detected. Therefore, these bits are always set to 0. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 185 [1] = Encoder 2 [2] = Encoder 3 Bit field: Signal name 1 signal 0 signal Linear encoder Absolute encoder Multiturn encoder Track A/B sq-wave Track A/B sine Track C/D Hall sensor EnDat encoder SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 186 Remote sense (only SMC30) Resolver excit Dependency: Refer to: p0404 Note: ZM: Zero mark This parameter is only used for diagnostics. A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 187 When the property is set, the following parameters can be changed without the actual value in the encoder interface becoming invalid (state r0481.14 = 1 "parking encoder active"): p0314, p0315, p0430, p0431, p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 188 The extended functions can be configured using p0437. For bit 13: Encoder faults can be acknowledged via Gn_STW.15. For bit 14: Only for internal Siemens use. For bit 23: When the property is set, commutation with zero mark can be de-selected using p0430.23. For bit 24: If the property is set, commutation to the selected zero mark can be carried out.
  • Page 189 The extended functions can be configured using p0437. For bit 13: Encoder faults can be acknowledged via Gn_STW.15. For bit 14: Only for internal Siemens use. For bit 23: When the property is set, commutation with zero mark can be de-selected using p0430.23. For bit 24: If the property is set, commutation to the selected zero mark can be carried out.
  • Page 190 The extended functions can be configured using p0437. For bit 13: Encoder faults can be acknowledged via Gn_STW.15. For bit 14: Only for internal Siemens use. For bit 23: When the property is set, commutation with zero mark can be de-selected using p0430.23. For bit 24: If the property is set, commutation to the selected zero mark can be carried out.
  • Page 191 Note: A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present. For bit 09: Parameter p0426 or p0439 has been modified. These functions are not supported by the connected Sensor Module. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 192 Displays the actual serial number part 1 of the appropriate encoder. Index: [0] = Encoder 1 [1] = Encoder 2 [2] = Encoder 3 Dependency: Refer to: p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445, r0461, r0462, r0463, r0464 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 193 Displays the actual serial number part 3 of the appropriate encoder. Index: [0] = Encoder 1 [1] = Encoder 2 [2] = Encoder 3 Dependency: Refer to: p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445, r0460, r0461, r0463, r0464 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 194 Displays the actual serial number part 5 of the appropriate encoder. Index: [0] = Encoder 1 [1] = Encoder 2 [2] = Encoder 3 Dependency: Refer to: p0441, p0442, p0443, p0444, p0445, r0460, r0461, r0462, r0463 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 195 Refer to: r0460, r0461, r0462, r0463, r0464 Notice: An ASCII table (excerpt) can be found, for example, in the appendix to the List Manual. Note: The individual characters of the identification number/serial number are available coded as ASCII characters. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 196 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting - [nm] - [nm] - [nm] Description: Displays the resolution of the absolute position for a linear absolute encoder. Dependency: Refer to: p0422, p9514 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 197 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Displays the number of valid bits for the fine resolution of the redundant coarse position value. Dependency: Refer to: p9324, p9524 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 198 P-Group: Encoder Unit group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Displays the non safety-relevant measuring steps of POS1. Dependency: Refer to: p0416, p9513 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 199 Displays the bit number for the safe most significant bit (MSB) of the Gx_XIST1 coarse position. Index: [0] = Encoder 1 [1] = Encoder 2 [2] = Encoder 3 Note: MSB: Most Significant Bit SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 200 Display and connector output for the encoder actual position value Gn_XIST1 according to PROFIdrive for diagnostics. In contrast to r0482, the value is updated in each DRIVE-CLiQ basic clock cycle and displayed with sign. Index: [0] = Encoder 1 [1] = Encoder 2 [2] = Encoder 3 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 201 Sets the signal source for the encoder control word Gn_STW according to PROFIdrive. Note: When the function module "basic positioner" (r0108.4 = 1) is activated, the following BICO interconnection is established: CI: p0480[0] = r2520[0], CI: p0480[1] = r2520[1] and CI: p0480[2] = r2520[2] SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 202 Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Displays the encoder status word Gn_ZSW according to PROFIdrive. Bit field: Signal name 1 signal 0 signal Function 1 active Function 2 active Function 3 active Function 4 active SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 203 Update time = 4 * LCM(250 µs, 125 µs) = 4 * 250 µs = 1 ms Example 2: infeed, servo, vector Update time = 4 * LCM(250 µs, 125 µs, 500 µs) = 4 * 500 µs = 2 ms SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 204 7: Cancellation, fetch measured value (e.g. illegal change from flying measurement to reference mark search). 8: Abort, absolute value transfer. 3841: Function not supported. 4097: Abort, reference mark search due to an initialization error. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 205 The values are valid when the safety position actual value sensing is activated (p0430.19 = 1). Refer to: p0430 Note: This absolute value does not change, contrary to r0482, when de-selecting the function "parking axis". SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 206 Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Displays the raw value of the absolute encoder actual value before the measuring gear. Index: [0] = Encoder 1 [1] = Encoder 2 [2] = Encoder 3 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 207 Displays the encoder control word Gn_STW according to PROFIdrive for diagnostics. Bit field: Signal name 1 signal 0 signal Request function 1 Request function 2 Request function 3 Request function 4 Request command bit 0 Request command bit 1 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 208 Value: No meas probe DI/DO 9 (X122.10/X121.8) DI/DO 10 (X122.12/X121.10) DI/DO 11 (X122.13/X121.11) DI/DO 13 (X132.10/X131.2) DI/DO 14 (X132.12/X131.4) DI/DO 15 (X132.13/X131.5) DI/DO 8 (X122.9/X121.7) DI/DO 12 (X132.9/X131.1) Dependency: Refer to: p0489, p0728 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 209 Value: No meas probe DI/DO 9 (X122.10/X121.8) DI/DO 10 (X122.12/X121.10) DI/DO 11 (X122.13/X121.11) DI/DO 13 (X132.10/X131.2) DI/DO 14 (X132.12/X131.4) DI/DO 15 (X132.13/X131.5) DI/DO 8 (X122.9/X121.7) DI/DO 12 (X132.9/X131.1) Dependency: Refer to: p0488, p0728 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 210 However, faults are output as alarm and the message bit "Fault active" (r2139.3) is not set. The encoder fault has to be acknowledged via the encoder interface in order to resume operation with encoder. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 211 However, if the maximum speed difference is exceeded over several sampling times, then a corresponding fault is output. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 212 For CX32, NX10 and NX15, only DI/DO 9, 10, 11 can be selected as fast inputs (refer to the Equipment Manual). Regarding the terminal designation: The first designation is valid for CU320, the second for CU310. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 213 DI/DO 11 (X122.13/X121.11) DI/DO 13 (X132.10/X131.2) DI/DO 14 (X132.12/X131.4) DI/DO 15 (X132.13/X131.5) DI/DO 8 (X122.9/X121.7) DI/DO 12 (X132.9/X131.1) Index: [0] = Encoder 1 [1] = Encoder 2 [2] = Encoder 3 Dependency: Refer to: p0494 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 214 An input can only be assigned to one encoder as measuring probe 1, 2 or equivalent zero mark. Exception: The same encoder can be simultaneously used as measuring probe and equivalent zero mark as both functions cannot be simultaneously requested. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 215 For p0496 = 11 (resolver): 2900 mV <--> 13107 dec, internal processor offset is corrected For p0496 = 11, 21 (sin/cos 1 Vpp, EnDat): 500 mV <--> 10650 dec, internal processor offset is corrected SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 216 Raw value track C, r0499: Raw value track D r0498: CD position X (-D/2), r0499: CD position Y (C/2) r0498: CD position Phi, r0499: CD pos. Phi - mech. revolution r0497: Zero mark status SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 217 For p0496 = 52: In 1/4 encoder pulses For p0496 = 60: voltage, channel A in mV, voltage, channel B in mV For p0496 = 61: Channel A: encoder periods <--> 2^16, channel B: encoder periods <--> 2^16 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 218 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Displays the trace signal for encoder diagnostics (low component). The signal to be output is selected in p0496. Dependency: Refer to: p0496, r0497, r0499 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 219 - p1574 = 10 V (separately excited synchronous motor: 20 V) - p1750.2 = 0 - p1802 = 4 (SVM/FLB without overcontrol) - p1803 = 106 % - p1610 = 50 % - p1611 = 30 % - p1310 = 50 % SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 220 - p1130, p1131 ramp-function generator rounding calculated from p1120, p1121 and r0345. The moment of inertia estimator (p1400 bit 18, p5310) can be used, depending on the specific application, to adaptively determine the load moment of inertia. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 221 [9] = Parameters in p0524[0...19] Dependency: Refer to: p0515, p0516, p0517, p0518, p0519, p0520, p0521, p0522, p0523, p0524 Notice: This parameter is only changed if a warm restart or save with subsequent power off/on is carried out. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 222 Expert list: 1 Factory setting 4294967295 Description: Sets the parameters with reference value in p0514[2] for the specific scaling. p0517[0]: parameter number p0517[1]: parameter number p0517[2]: parameter number p0517[19]: parameter number Dependency: Refer to: p0514 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 223 Expert list: 1 Factory setting 4294967295 Description: Sets the parameters with reference value in p0514[5] for the specific scaling. p0520[0]: parameter number p0520[1]: parameter number p0520[2]: parameter number p0520[19]: parameter number Dependency: Refer to: p0514 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 224 Expert list: 1 Factory setting 4294967295 Description: Sets the parameters with reference value in p0514[8] for the specific scaling. p0523[0]: parameter number p0523[1]: parameter number p0523[2]: parameter number p0523[19]: parameter number Dependency: Refer to: p0514 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 225 Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Sets the bearing version. Corresponding to the bearing version entered, its code number (p0531) is automatically set. 0 = No data 1 = Manual entry 101 = STANDARD SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 226 If p0532 is changed during quick commissioning (p0010 = 1), then the maximum speed p1082, which is also associated with quick commissioning, is pre-assigned appropriately. This is not the case when commissioning the motor (p0010 = 3). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 227 This number of parameters can be automatically excluded from the calculation of the motor and control parameters (see p0340, p0578), starting from index 0. Note: Defines the number of entries in p0571 that should be taken into account. The inhibit list is deactivated for a value of 0. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 228 The automatic calculation (p0340, p0578) also overwrites the parameters of the inhibit list (p0571). If value = 1: The automatic calculation (p0340, p0578) does not overwrite the parameters of the inhibit list (p0571). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 229 Selects the units for the parameters of the technology controller. For p0595 = 1, 2, the reference quantity set in p0596 is not active. Value: 1 referred no dimensions °C ltr/s m³/s ltr/min m³/min ltr/h m³/h kg/s kg/min SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 230 Temperature sensor via a BICO interconnection Temperature sensor via Motor Module / CU terminals Temperature sensor via a BICO interconnection p0608 Temperature sensor via a BICO interconnection p0609 Dependency: Refer to: r0458, p0601, p0603 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 231 After tripping, an appropriate alarm is output and after the delay time set in p0606 has expired, an appropriate fault is output. For p0601 = 5: It is only possible to evaluate a PT100 for p0600 = 11 and r0192.15 = 1. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 232 Sets the power unit number to which the temperature sensor is connected. The value corresponds to the Power unit Data Set number (PDS) of the power unit. The number of power unit data sets is defined in p0120. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 233 The following applies for firmware version < 4.7 SP6 or p0612.8 = 0: - sets the alarm threshold. If the model temperature (r0034) exceeds the alarm threshold, then alarm A07012 is output. - this value is simultaneously used as rated winding temperature. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 234 The parameterized time is internally rounded-off to an integer multiple of 48 ms. Note: If the motor is an induction motor, the timer is switched off when setting the minimum value and no alarm is output. Temperature monitoring is then based on the thermal model. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 235 (bimetal contact open). Note: When using a Terminal Module 120 (TM120), the following applies: - the sensor type used is set using p4100. - the temperature signal is interconnected using connector output r4105. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 236 When parameter p0611 is reset to 0, then this switches out the thermal I2t motor model (refer to p0612). If no temperature sensor is parameterized, then the ambient temperature for the thermal motor model is referred to p0625. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 237 From firmware version 4.7 the following applies (bits 1 and 9): - this bit should be set. Temperature model 2 then operates in the extended mode and the result of the model is more precise. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 238 - when a catalog motor with motor temperature model 1 (I2t) is being commissioned for the first time, the threshold value is copied from p0615 to p5391. - p5391 is of significance for evaluating the fault threshold. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 239 Identification of the stator resistance only when the drive is switched on for the first time (pulse enable) after booting the Control Unit. p0621 = 2: Identification of the stator resistance every time the drive is switched on (pulse enable). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 240 Not for motor type: PMSM, SESM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting - [ohm] - [ohm] - [ohm] Description: Displays the stator resistance determined using the Rs identification after switching on again. Dependency: Refer to: p0621, p0622 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 241 Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. Note: When quick commissioning is exited with p3900 > 0, then the parameter is reset if a catalog motor has not been selected (p0300). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 242 The measurement of the reference value is activated by the automatic calculation (p0340 = 1, 2), if the following conditions apply: - the motor temperature is at this instant in time less than 30 °C (r0035). - a temperature sensor is not being used (p0601). Refer to: p0621, r0623 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 243 - [°C] - [°C] - [°C] Description: Displays the rotor temperature of the motor temperature model (models 2 and 3). Note: For motor temperature model 1 (p0612.0 = 1), this parameter is not valid: SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 244 The non-linear and cross-coupled quadrature axis flux functions are defined using 4 coefficients. This parameter describes the gradients of the saturated component over the quadrature axis current. Dependency: Refer to: p0634, p0635, p0636 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 245 In the field-weakening range, synchronous motors can, when a fault condition exists, generate high DC link voltages. The following possibilities exist to protect the drive system from being destroyed due to overvoltage: - limit the maximum speed (p1082) without any additional protection. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 246 For p0651 = 0, the operating hours counter is disabled. When setting p0651 to 0, then p0650 is automatically set to 0. The operating hours counter only runs with motor data set 0 and 1 (MDS). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 247 Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting 10.0 [%] 300.0 [%] 100.0 [%] Description: Factor to evaluate the damping inductance in the direction of the rotor axis (d axis). Dependency: Refer to: p0358, r0380 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 248 Digital input, measuring probe 8 Value: No meas probe DI/DO 9 (X122.10/X121.8) DI/DO 10 (X122.12/X121.10) DI/DO 11 (X122.13/X121.11) DI/DO 13 (X132.10/X131.2) DI/DO 14 (X132.12/X131.4) DI/DO 15 (X132.13/X131.5) DI/DO 8 (X122.9/X121.7) DI/DO 12 (X132.9/X131.1) Dependency: Refer to: p0728 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 249 For p0684 = 1: Changing this evaluation procedure to p0684 = 0 is possible in the RUN state. Changing this evaluation procedure to p0684 = 16 is only activated after parameter save and POWER ON. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 250 Measuring time, rising edge measuring probe 7 r0686[7]: Measuring time, rising edge measuring probe 8 Note: The parameter is only active for the evaluation procedure p0684 = 0, 1. For p0684 = 16, r0686[0...7] = 0 is displayed. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 251 Sub-sampling measuring probe 2 High Sub-sampling measuring probe 3 High Sub-sampling measuring probe 4 High Sub-sampling measuring probe 5 High Sub-sampling measuring probe 6 High Sub-sampling measuring probe 7 High Sub-sampling measuring probe 8 High SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 252 Expert list: 1 RESM Factory setting Description: Sets the pole pair number of the exciter machine for brushless excitation. Notice: For a value = 0, brushless excitation is not activated. Note: BLE: brushless excitation SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 253 The macros in the specified directory are displayed in r8571. r8571 is not in the expert list of the commissioning software. Macros available as standard are described in the technical documentation of the particular product. BI: Binector Input CDS: Command Data Set SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 254 High DI 4 (X132.1 / -) High DI 5 (X132.2 / -) High DI 6 (X132.3 / -) High DI 7 (X132.4 / -) High DI/DO 8 (X122.9/X121.7) High DI/DO 9 (X122.10/X121.8) High SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 255 High DI 21 (X132.6/X120.10) High Dependency: Refer to: r0722 Notice: Regarding the terminal designation: The first designation is valid for CU320, the second for CU310. Note: DI: Digital Input DI/DO: Bidirectional Digital Input/Output SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 256 Refer to: p0728, p0738, p0739, p0740, p0741, p0742, p0743, p0744, p0745, r0747, p0748 Notice: Regarding the terminal designation: The first designation is valid for CU320, the second for CU310. Note: The DI/DO must be connected as output (p0728). DI/DO: Bidirectional Digital Input/Output SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 257 Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Sets the signal source for terminal DI/DO 11 (X122.13 / X121.11). Regarding the terminal designation: The first designation is valid for CU320, the second for CU310. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 258 The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. Note: Prerequisite: The DI/DO must be set as an output (p0728.14 = 1). DI/DO: Bidirectional Digital Input/Output SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 259 Inverted Not inverted DI/DO 11 (X122.13/X121.11) Inverted Not inverted DI/DO 12 (X132.9/X131.1) Inverted Not inverted DI/DO 13 (X132.10/X131.2) Inverted Not inverted DI/DO 14 (X132.12/X131.4) Inverted Not inverted DI/DO 15 (X132.13/X131.5) Inverted Not inverted SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 260 Description: Displays the actual output voltage for the test sockets. Index: [0] = T0 [1] = T1 [2] = T2 Dependency: Refer to: p0771, r0772, p0776, p0777, p0778, p0779, p0780, p0783, p0784, r0786 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 261 This parameter specifies the y coordinate (output voltage) of the first point on the characteristic. Index: [0] = T0 [1] = T1 [2] = T2 Dependency: Can only be set when p0776 = 99. Refer to: p0777, p0779, p0780, r0786 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 262 Unit selection: - CU_G150_DP Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Sets the limit for a signal to be output via test sockets. Value: Limiting off Limiting on SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 263 Sets the gain of a signal output of a physical address via test sockets. Index: [0] = T0 [1] = T1 [2] = T2 Dependency: Changes only become effective if p0776 does not equal 99. Refer to: p0788 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 264 Regarding the terminal designation: The first designation stands for CU320, the second for CU310. Note: This parameter is not saved when data is backed-up (p0971, p0977). DI: Digital Input DI/DO: Bidirectional Digital Input/Output SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 265 [2] = Not available - analog outputs (AO) Dependency: The parameter can only be modified for p0009 = 3, 29. Refer to: p0009 Note: The changed sampling time is immediately effective after a completed sub-boot (p0009 -> 0). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 266 2. In index 1, enter the command data set that is to be copied into. 3. Start copying: set index 2 from 0 to 1. p0809[2] is automatically set to 0 when copying is completed. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 267 2. In index 1, enter the drive data set data that is to be copied into. 3. Start copying: set index 2 from 0 to 1. p0819[2] is automatically set to 0 when copying is completed. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 268 Sets the signal source to select the Drive Data Set, bit 3 (DDS, bit 3). Dependency: Refer to: r0051, r0837 Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 269 A motor is only changed over (a new motor selected) after the pulses have been suppressed. When the motor data sets are changed over, the following applies: Bit numbers that are not identical, signify that the motor must be changed over. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 270 A changeover is to be made between MDS0 (motor 0) and MDS1 (motor 1). The contactors should be switched using bit 4 (contactor 0) and 5 (contactor 1). The changeover should be made with an interconnection of the feedback signal. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 271 Feedback signal contactor 11 Closed Opened Feedback signal contactor 12 Closed Opened Feedback signal contactor 13 Closed Opened Feedback signal contactor 14 Closed Opened Feedback signal contactor 15 Closed Opened Dependency: Refer to: p0831 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 272 A data set changeover is delayed by the time required for the internal parameter calculation. For bit 04: A data set changeover is only carried out when the armature short circuit is not activated. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 273 CDS select. bit 2 CDS select. bit 3 Dependency: Refer to: r0050, p0810, p0811 Note: Command data sets are selected via binector input p0810 and following. The currently effective command data set is displayed in r0050. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 274 - for feedback signal, previous contactor "Open". The new motor contactor is controlled (energized) after the delay time has expired. - for the feedback signal, new motor contactor "Closed". The pulses are enabled after the delay time has expired. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 275 - BI: p0840 = 0 signal: OFF1 (reduce Vdc along the ramp, then pulse suppression and precharging contactor/line contactor open) - BI: p0840 = 0/1 signal: ON (precharging contactor/line contactor close, pulses can be enabled) SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 276 The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. Note: For binector input p0844 = 0 signal or p0845 = 0 signal, the following applies: - precharging contactor/line contactor is additionally opened. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 277 When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is effective. Note: For binector input p0844 = 0 signal or p0845 = 0 signal, the following applies: - precharging contactor/line contactor is additionally opened. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 278 When "master control from PC" is activated, this binector input is effective. Note: For drives with closed-loop torque control (activated using p1501), the following applies: BI: p0849 = 0 signal: - no dedicated braking response, but pulse suppression when standstill is detected (p1226, p1227). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 279 Sets the signal source for the command "control by PLC/no control by PLC". For the PROFIdrive profile, this command corresponds to control word 1 bit 10 (STW1.10). BI: p0854 = 0 signal No control by PLC SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 280 After the pulse enable (operation enabled, p0852), the monitoring time is re-started. If the infeed does not signal ready to the drive within the monitoring time (using BI: p0864 of the drive), fault F07840 is initiated. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 281 Sets the monitoring time of the line contactor. This time starts each time that the line contactor switches (r0863.1). If a feedback signal is not received from the line contactor within the time, a message is output. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 282 The first drive only transfers the operating signal to the next drive after it has reached its ready condition. For bit 01: Bit 1 is used to control an external line contactor. For bit 02: This bit only signals line supply failure for Active Infeed (A_INF) and Smart Infeed (S_INF). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 283 For AC/AC converters, "Chassis" format: Setting the wait time for the thyristor rectifier. Note: The following applies if p0868 = 65000 ms: The debounce time defined internally in the power unit's EEPROM is implemented. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 284 In order that signal BO: r0873 is available at one of the infeeds, then BI: p0874 of the one infeed must be interconnected to BO: r0863.0 of the other infeed. Dependency: Refer to: r0863, p0874 Note: Mixed operation is not possible with the Active Line Module (ALM)! SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 285 Note: The power unit is only deactivated when the pulses are suppressed. For units connected in parallel, when one of the power units is deactivated, then the enable in p7001 is withdrawn. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 286 Bit field: Signal name 1 signal 0 signal Synchronization signal SYN Real time synchronization PING Acknowledge fault Master sign-of-life bit 0 Master sign-of-life bit 1 Master sign-of-life bit 2 Master sign-of-life bit 3 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 287 Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Display and connector output for the control word of the sequence control for encoder drive object. Bit field: Signal name 1 signal 0 signal Master control by PLC SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 288 When the "Safe Brake Control" (SBC) is activated and selected, the brake is no longer controlled using this signal. For bit 14, 15: These signals are only of significance when the "extended brake control" function module is activated (r0108.14 = 1). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 289 Permissible PROFIBUS addresses: 1 ... 126 (01 hex ... 7E hex) Address 126 is used for commissioning. Every PROFIBUS address change only becomes effective after a POWER ON. The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 290 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Sets the send and receive telegram. Value: 390: SIEMENS telegram 390, PZD-2/2 391: SIEMENS telegram 391, PZD-3/7 392: SIEMENS telegram 392, PZD-3/15 393: SIEMENS telegram 393, PZD-4/21 394:...
  • Page 291 Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Sets the send and receive telegram. Value: 370: SIEMENS telegram 370, PZD-1/1 371: SIEMENS telegram 371, PZD-5/8 999: Free telegram configuration with BICO Note: If a value is not equal to 999, a telegram is set and the automatically set interconnections in the telegram are inhibited.
  • Page 292 The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139). Fault buffer structure (general principle): r0945[0], r0949[0], r0948[0], r2109[0], r3115[0] --> actual fault case, fault 1 . . . r0945[7], r0949[7], r0948[7], r2109[7], r3115[7] --> actual fault case, fault 8 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 293 Refer to: r0945, r0947, r0948, r2109, r2130, r2133, r2136, r3115, r3120, r3122 Note: The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139). The structure of the fault buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r0945. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 294 Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Displays the device identification. Index: [0] = Company (Siemens = 42) [1] = Device type [2] = Firmware version [3] = Firmware date (year) [4] = Firmware date (day/month) [5] = Number of drive objects...
  • Page 295 Device type: r0964[1] = 5200 --> SINAMICS G150 CU320-2 DP r0964[1] = 5201 --> SINAMICS G150 CU320-2 PN r0964[1] = 5210 --> SINAMICS G130 CU320-2 DP r0964[1] = 5211 --> SINAMICS G130 CU320-2 PN r0965 PROFIdrive profile number / PD profile number...
  • Page 296 The sampling times (p0111, p0112, p0115) are only not reset if this results in a conflict with the basic clock cycle (p0110). Value: Inactive Start a parameter reset 100: Start a BICO interconnection reset SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 297 Parameter p0151 is not reset. It is only reset if the entire drive unit is reset to the factory settings (p0976). Value: Inactive Start a parameter reset 100: Start a BICO interconnection reset Dependency: Refer to: p0010 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 298 The password for Safety Integrated must be set. When Safety Integrated is enabled, this can result in error messages, which then require an acceptance test to be performed. Then save the parameters and carry out a POWER ON. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 299 Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Sets the required procedure to execute a hardware reset for the drive unit. Value: Inactive Hardware-Reset immediate Hardware reset preparation Hardware reset after cyclic communication has failed SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 300 Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Displays the identification of the drive object. Index: [0] = Company (Siemens = 42) [1] = Drive object type [2] = Firmware version [3] = Firmware date (year) [4] = Firmware date (day/month) [5] = PROFIdrive drive object type class...
  • Page 301 Start dnload of param. saved in non-volatile mem w/ p0977=10 Start dnload of param. saved in non-volatile mem w/ p0977=11 Start dnload of param. saved in non-volatile mem w/ p0977=12 Start download Siemens internal setting 20 Start download Siemens internal setting 21 Start download Siemens internal setting 22...
  • Page 302 [2] = Resolution enc 1 [3] = Shift factor G1_XIST1 [4] = Shift factor G1_XIST2 [5] = Distinguishable revolutions encoder 1 [6...10] = Reserved [11] = Type encoder 2 [12] = Resolution enc 2 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 303 [3] = Shift factor G1_XIST1 [4] = Shift factor G1_XIST2 [5] = Distinguishable distance encoder 1 [6...10] = Reserved Note: Information about the individual indices can be taken from the following literature: PROFIdrive Profile Drive Technology SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 304 ... r0989[0...299] The parameters in this list are not displayed in the expert list of the commissioning software. However, they can be read from a higher-level control system (e.g. PROFIBUS master). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 305 ... r0999[0...99] The parameters in this list are not displayed in the expert list of the commissioning software. However, they can be read from a higher-level control system (e.g. PROFIBUS master). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 306 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Factory setting -210000.000 [rpm] 210000.000 [rpm] 0.000 [rpm] Description: Setting and connector output for fixed speed setpoint 3. Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 307 Setting and connector output for fixed speed setpoint 7. Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197 Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 308 Setting and connector output for fixed speed setpoint 11. Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197 Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 309 Setting and connector output for fixed speed setpoint 15. Dependency: Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1022, p1023, r1024, r1197 Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 310 Sets the values for the fixed speed setpoints 1 ... 15 using p1001 ... p1015. Refer to: p1020, p1021, p1023, r1197 Note: If a fixed speed setpoint has not been selected (p1020 ... p1023 = 0, r1197 = 0), then r1024 = 0 (setpoint = 0). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 311 The following prerequisites must be fulfilled in order to be able to save the setpoint (Bit 03 = 1) in a non-volatile fashion: - Firmware with V2.3 or higher. - Control Unit 320 (CU320) with hardware version C or higher (module with NVRAM). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 312 The setpoint change (CO: r1050) depends on the set ramp-down time (p1048) and the duration of the signal that is present (BI: p1036). Dependency: Refer to: p1035 Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 313 0.000 [rpm] Description: Sets the starting value for the motorized potentiometer. This starting value becomes effective after the drive has been switched off. Dependency: Only effective if p1030.0 = 0. Refer to: p1030 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 314 Sets the signal source for the setting value for the motorized potentiometer. Dependency: Refer to: p1043 Note: The setting value (CI: p1044) becomes effective for a 0/1 edge of the setting command (BI: p1043). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 315 For "With ramp-function generator", after an OFF1, OFF2, OFF3 or for a 0 signal via BI: p0852 (inhibit operation, suppress pulses) the ramp-function generator output (r1050) is set to the starting value (configuration via p1030.0). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 316 The drive is enabled for jogging using BI: p1055 or BI: p1056. The command "ON/OFF1" can be issued using BI: p0840 or using BI: p1055/p1056. Only the signal source that was used to switch on can also be used to switch off again. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 317 Fixed speed setpoint effective r1050: Motor. potentiometer setpoint after the ramp-function generator Dependency: Refer to: p1071, r1073, r1078 Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 318 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Factory setting - [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm] Description: Displays the effective supplementary setpoint. The value shown is the additional setpoint after scaling. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 319 For vector control (p1300 = 20 ... 23) the maximum speed is limited to 60.0 / (8.333 x p0115[0] x r0313). This can be identified by a reduction in r1084. p1082 is not changed in this process due to the fact that the operating mode p1300 can be changed over. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 320 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Factory setting - [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm] Description: Display and connector output for the active positive speed limit. Dependency: Refer to: p1082, p1083, p1085 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 321 Notice: Skip bandwidths can also become ineffective as a result of the downstream limits in the setpoint channel. Note: The skip (suppression) speeds can be used to prevent the effects of mechanical resonance. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 322 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Sets the signal source for scaling the skip speeds. Dependency: Refer to: p1091, p1092, p1093, p1094 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 323 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Sets the signal source for lowest possible motor speed. Dependency: Refer to: p1080 Notice: The effective minimum speed is formed from p1080 and p1106. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 324 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Factory setting - [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm] Description: Displays the speed/velocity setpoint after the changeover and limiting the direction. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 325 The ramp-function generator ramps-down the speed setpoint from the maximum speed (p1082) down to standstill (setpoint = 0) in this time. Further, the ramp-down time is always effective for OFF1. Dependency: Refer to: p1082, p1139 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 326 During the final rounding-off, the output of the ramp-function generator continues to go in the direction of the previous setpoint (overshoot). After the final rounding-off has been completed, the output goes toward the new setpoint. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 327 Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Sets the signal source for scaling the ramp-down time of the ramp-function generator. Dependency: Refer to: p1121 Note: The ramp-down time is set in p1121. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 328 For the PROFIdrive profile, this command corresponds to control word 1 bit 6 (STW1.6). BI: p1142 = 0 signal Inhibits the setpoint (the ramp-function generator input is set to zero). BI: p1142 = 1 signal Setpoint enable. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 329 The output value of the ramp-function generator is tracked (corrected) corresponding to the maximum possible drive acceleration. The reference value is the deviation at the speed/velocity controller input that is necessary to ensure that the motor accelerates at the torque/force limit. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 330 Unit group: 3_1 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Factory setting - [rpm] - [rpm] - [rpm] Description: Displays the setpoint at the output of the ramp-function generator. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 331 The effectiveness of this setpoint depends on, e.g. STW1.4 and STW1.6. Refer to: r0002, p0840, p0844, p0848, p0852, p0854, r0898, p1140, p1142, p1160, r1170, p1189 Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 332 Factory setting 0011 bin Description: Sets the configuration for the speed setpoint. Bit field: Signal name 1 signal 0 signal Interpolation ramp-fct gen/speed controller 3080 active Interpol. op-loop ctrl /speed controller active Yes 3080 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 333 Signal name 1 signal 0 signal Ramp-up active Ramp-down active RFG active Ramp-function generator set Ramp-function generator held Ramp-function generator tracking active Maximum limit active Ramp-function generator acceleration positive Ramp-function generator acceleration negative SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 334 If p1200 is changed while commissioning (p0009, p0010 > 0), then it is possible that the old value will no longer be able to be set. The reason for this is that the dynamic limits of p1200 have been changed by a parameter that was set when the drive was commissioned (e.g. p0300). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 335 An unfavorable parameter value can result in the motor behaving in an uncontrollable fashion. For vector control, a value that is too low or too high can cause flying restart to become unstable. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 336 Speed adaptation circuit set I comp to 0 Current control on Isd_set = 0 A Frequency held Search in the positive direction Search Started Current impressed Search interrupted Speed adaptation circuit deviation = 0 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 337 - if a Voltage Sensing Module (VSM) is being used, the line supply voltage amplitude is greater than 3 % of the parameterized unit supply voltage (p0210) to protect the precharging resistors against continuous filter current when the line supply partially returns. Dependency: Refer to: r0209, p0210, r1214 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 338 Faults that are present are automatically acknowledged. If new faults occur after a successful fault acknowledgment, then these are also automatically acknowledged again. p1211 has no influence on the number of acknowledgment attempts. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 339 Sets the start attempts of the automatic restart function for p1210 = 4, 6. Dependency: A change is only accepted and made in the state "initialization" (r1214.0) and "wait for alarm" (r1214.1). Refer to: p1210, r1214 Refer to: F07320 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 340 After a line supply failure, acknowledgment is immediate and when the line supply returns, the system is switched on. If, between successfully acknowledging the line fault and the line supply returning, another fault occurs, then its acknowledgment also causes the start counter to be decremented. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 341 F07320 is generated at each restart. If, for p1210 = 1, the time in p1213 is set lower than in p1212, then fault F07320 is also generated at each restart. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 342 Displays the status of the automatic restart (AR). Bit field: Signal name 1 signal 0 signal Initialization Wait for alarm Auto restart act Setting the acknowledgment command Acknowledge alarms Restart Delay time running after automatic switch- Fault SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 343 Auto restart act Setting the acknowledgment command Acknowledge alarms Restart Delay time running after automatic switch- Fault Effective fault Start count. bit 0 Start count. bit 1 Start count. bit 2 Start count. bit 3 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 344 = 1) is not practical if there is no motor holding brake. The parameterization "motor holding brake the same as sequence control, connection via BICO" and "Safe Brake Control" enabled (p1215 = 3, p9602 = 1, p9802 = 1) is not practical. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 345 Sets the signal source for a conditional opening of the motor holding brake. Dependency: Refer to: p1215 Note: [0]: Signal, open brake, AND logic operation, input 1 [1]: Signal, open brake, AND logic operation, input 2 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 346 Sets the signal source for the feedback signal "brake closed". For motor holding brakes with feedback signal, the signal "brake closed" can be activated using p1275.5 = 1. Dependency: Refer to: p1223, p1275 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 347 Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2000 Expert list: 1 Factory setting 63[0] Description: Sets the signal source "threshold value" for the standstill identification. Dependency: Refer to: p1226, p1228, r1229 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 348 For p1227 = 300.000 s the following applies: Monitoring is deactivated. For p1227 = 0.000 s, the following applies: With OFF1 or OFF3 and a ramp-down time = 0, the pulses are immediately suppressed and the motor "coasts" down. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 349 Sets the signal source to activate the armature short-circuit or DC braking. Dependency: Refer to: p1231, p1232, p1233, p1234, p1235, p1236, p1237, r1238, r1239, p1345, p1346 Note: 1 signal: Armature short-circuit/DC braking activated. 0 signal: Armature short-circuit/DC braking deactivated. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 350 - using the DC link voltage - as to whether the short-circuit should be activated. In this case, protection is also provided even if the DRIVE-CLiQ connection between the Control Unit and Motor Module was interrupted. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 351 Not for motor type: PMSM, SESM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting 0.00 [Arms] 10000.00 [Arms] 0.00 [Arms] Description: Sets the braking current for DC braking. Dependency: Refer to: p1230, p1231, p1233, p1234, r1239, p1345, p1346 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 352 In order that the pulses are not enabled when the contactor is closed, the contactor feedback signal must lag by a sufficiently long time when opening the contactor. Note: 1 signal: The contactor is closed. 0 signal: The contactor is open. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 353 - the external armature short-circuit can be selected with p1231 = 1. For state "ready" (r1238 = 1): - as soon as the activation criterion is fulfilled, then a transition is made into the state "active" (r1238 = 2). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 354 The external armature short-circuit configuration is ready and is activated as soon as the activation criterion is fulfilled. For bit 03: 1: A feedback signal from an external contactor was parameterized in BI: p1235. Internal voltage protection / internal armature short-circuit (bits 4 ... 6): SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 355 In this case, the controller dynamic performance should be reduced or the Udc control of individual drives should be deactivated. Drives with Udc control must be able to brake and accelerate independently of one another. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 356 The pre-setting of the dynamic factor is based on the power units connected to DRIVE-CLiQ. It is assumed that the power units connected via DRIVE-CLiQ are also electrically connected to the DC link. If this is not the case, then the dynamic factor must be optimized manually. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 357 If several components are connected to the DC link, then the dynamic factor must be increased corresponding to the ratio of the additional capacitances to the capacitance of the component involved. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 358 0 [ms] Description: Sets the rate time constant for the DC link voltage controller (Vdc_min controller, Vdc_max controller). Dependency: The effective rate time is obtained taking into account p1243 (Vdc_max controller dynamic factor). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 359 Exiting the Vdc_min control before reaching motor standstill prevents the regenerative braking current from increasing significantly at low speeds, and after a pulse inhibit, means that the motor coasts down. However, the maximum braking torque can be set via the appropriate torque limiting. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 360 Note: Control bits 0 and 1 should be interconnected to the signal outputs via which the switches in the motor feeder cables should be controlled. These should be selected/dimensioned for switching under load. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 361 Func. diagram: - P-Group: - Unit group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: RESM Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Sets the signal source for the control command to the bypass. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 362 [0] = Switch motor/drive [1] = Switch motor/line supply Note: In the case of switches without a feedback signal, interconnect the corresponding control bit as the signal source: BI: p1269[0] = r1261.0 BI: p1269[1] = r1261.1 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 363 Value: Dependency: The following functions are deactivated in the simulation mode: - motor data identification routine - motor data identification routine, rotating without encoder - pole position identification SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 364 The pulse enable (BO: r1229.3) is independent of the timer that has been set (p1217, p1216). The particular enable is only defined by the feedback signal (BI: p1222, BI: p1223). The timers (p1216, p1217) only influence the alarm A07931 "Brake does not open" and A07932 "Brake does not close". SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 365 P-Group: Functions Unit group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Sets the signal source for the OR/AND logic operation. Dependency: Refer to: r1229 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 366 ASM: Induction motor (induction motor) PMSM: permanent-magnet synchronous motor For bit 00: This bit is equivalent to p1780 bit 1. For bit 01: This bit should only be set when required for large drives. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 367 4.000 [s] Description: Sets the monitoring time for the Vdc_max controller. If the down ramp of the speed setpoint is held for longer than the time set in p1284, then fault F07404 is output. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 368 Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting 0.000 100.000 0.500 Description: Sets the feedback factor for the ramp-function generator. Its ramp times are decelerated relative to the output signal of the Vdc_max controller. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 369 Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting 0.00 [Hz] 600.00 [Hz] 10.00 [Hz] Description: Sets the output limit for the Vdc min controller (DC link undervoltage controller). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 370 If this value is exceeded a fault is output; the required response can be parameterized . Note: Exiting the Vdc_min control before reaching motor standstill prevents the regenerative braking current from increasing significantly at low speeds, and after a pulse inhibit, means that the motor coasts down. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 371 Sets the open and closed-loop control mode of a drive. Value: U/f control with linear characteristic U/f control with linear characteristic and FCC U/f control with parabolic characteristic U/f control with parameterizable characteristic SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 372 Sets the configuration for the U/f control. Bit field: Signal name 1 signal 0 signal Output voltage starting angle zero Take into account the setpoint voltage sign Reserved Field orientation Immediate setpoint transfer for pulse inhibit SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 373 180 degrees, thereby achieving a negative output voltage. The voltage boost is in this case not active (p1310, p1311). For bit 02: Only for internal Siemens use. For bit 06: Only for p1300 = 19.
  • Page 374 Refer to: p1300, p1310, p1311, p1321, p1322, p1323, p1324, p1325, p1326, p1327 Note: Linear interpolation is carried out between the points 0 Hz/p1310, p1320/p1321 ... p1326/p1327. The voltage boost when accelerating (p1311) is also applied to the freely programmable U/f characteristic. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 375 The following applies to the frequency values: p1320 <= p1322 <= p1324 <= p1326. Otherwise, a standard characteristic is used that contains the rated motor operating point. Refer to: p1310, p1311, p1320, p1321, p1322, p1323, p1325, p1326, p1327 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 376 Refer to: p1310, p1311, p1320, p1321, p1322, p1323, p1324, p1325, p1326 Note: Linear interpolation is carried out between the points 0 Hz/p1310, p1320/p1321 ... p1326/p1327. The voltage boost when accelerating (p1311) is also applied to the freely programmable U/f characteristic. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 377 0.00 [Hz] Description: Sets the starting frequency of the slip compensation. Note: For p1334 = 0, the starting frequency of the slip compensation is automatically set to 6 % of the rated motor frequency. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 378 Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting 0.00 100.00 0.00 Description: Sets the gain for resonance damping for U/f control. Dependency: Refer to: p1300, p1339, p1349 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 379 Sets the integral time for the I_max frequency controller. Dependency: Refer to: p1340 Note: When p1341 = 0, the current limiting controller influencing the frequency is deactivated and only the current limiting controller influencing the output voltage remains active (p1345, p1346). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 380 The controller settings are also used in the current controller of the DC braking (refer to p1232). For p1346 = 0, the following applies: The integral time of the I_max voltage controller is deactivated. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 381 Disadvantage: The motor can move while it is being magnetized 1 = on (voltage is continually established) Advantage: The motor is unlikely to rotate Disadvantage: The flux is established slower -> torque is available later SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 382 - [°] Description: Displays the output of the differential angular generation. Note: The difference between the setpoint angle, read-in in p1356 and the actual value of the U/f control delayed with p1358 is displayed. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 383 The ripple of the absolute current r0068 is monitored. The reference value is the average value of the absolute current. The minimum monitoring value is 10 % of the power unit rated current. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 384 Always active For n_ctrl enab 6060 Sensorless vector control speed pre-control Yes 6030 I component for limiting Enable Hold 6030 Moment of inertia estimator active 6030 Anti-windup for integral component 6030 Acceleration model 6031 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 385 For bit 00 (only for induction motors): Initially, the flux is only established with a low rate of rise when magnetizing the induction motor. The flux setpoint p1570 is reached again at the end of the magnetizing time p0346. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 386 Sets the configuration for the closed-loop control and the motor model. Bit field: Signal name 1 signal 0 signal Speed-following error correction active Current controller adaptation active Taking into account slip for speed and frequency calculation Changeover current model/voltage model with speed setpoint SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 387 Encoderless operation active Torque control active 6030, 6060, 8010 Speed control active 6040 Speed controller I component frozen 6040 Speed controller I component set 6040 Torque limit reached 6060 Upper torque limit active 6060 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 388 Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting 0.00 [ms] 5000.00 [ms] 0.00 [ms] Description: Sets the time constant for the speed setpoint filter 1 (PT1). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 389 Recommendation: The reference model is correctly set when the characteristics of p1439 (reference model output) and p1445 (actual speed value) are virtually identical when the I component of the speed controller is disabled. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 390 - [rpm] Description: Display and connector output for the speed setpoint at the output of the reference model. Dependency: For VECTOR (r0107) the following applies: The reference model is activated with p1400.3 = 1. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 391 (e.g. for an encoder DO via p0410). Otherwise, a positive coupling can occur in the speed control loop and the drive would then be accelerated up to the speed limit. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 392 Displays the speed actual value at the speed controller's free-wiring actual value input p1440. Dependency: Refer to: p1440 Note: This speed signal is only used by the speed controller and not by the motor model. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 393 Sets the smoothing time for the actual speed of the speed controller for encoderless closed-loop speed control. Note: The smoothing must be increased if there is gear backlash. For longer smoothing times, the integral time of the speed controller must also be increased (e.g. using p0340 = 4). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 394 If the upper transition point p1457 of the speed controller adaptation is set to lower values than the lower transition p1456, then the controller gain below p1457 is adapted with p1459 and above p1456, with p1458. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 395 If the upper transition point p1465 of the speed controller adaptation is set to lower values than the lower transition p1464, then the controller gain below p1465 is adapted with p1461. This means that an adaptation can be implemented for low speeds without having to change the controller parameters. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 396 If the upper transition point p1465 of the speed controller adaptation is set to lower values than the lower transition point p1464, then the controller below p1465 is adapted with p1461 or p1463. This means that an adaptation can be implemented for low speeds without having to change the controller parameters. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 397 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting - [ms] - [ms] - [ms] Description: Displays the effective integral time of the speed controller. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 398 P-Group: Closed-loop control Unit group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Sets the signal source to hold the integrator for the speed controller. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 399 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Sets the signal source for scaling the integrator setting value (p1478) of the speed controller. Dependency: Refer to: p1477, p1478 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 400 Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Factory setting -2000.0 [%] 2000.0 [%] 100.0 [%] Description: Sets the scaling for the compensation torque within the droop calculation. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 401 Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Enables the droop to be applied to the speed/velocity setpoint. Dependency: Refer to: p1486, p1487, p1488, p1489, r1490 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 402 The acceleration pre-control may not be used if the speed setpoint manifests significant ripple (e.g. analog setpoint) and the rounding-off in the speed ramp-function generator is disabled. We also recommend that the pre-control mode is not used if there is gearbox backlash. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 403 The macros in the specified directory are displayed in r8573. r8573 is not in the expert list of the commissioning software. Macros available as standard are described in the technical documentation of the particular product. CI: Connector Input SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 404 A change is made to closed-loop torque control if, in p1300, closed-loop torque control was selected or if the selection was made using the changeover source in p1501. it is also possible to change over in operation using p1501. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 405 P-Group: Closed-loop control Unit group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Factory setting -2000.0 [%] 2000.0 [%] 100.0 [%] Description: Sets the scaling for supplementary torque 2. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 406 Expert list: 1 Factory setting - [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm] Description: Displays the accelerating torque for pre-control of the speed controller. Index: [0] = Unsmoothed [1] = Smoothed Dependency: Refer to: p0341, p0342, p1496 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 407 Sets the signal source for the upper torque limit. Dependency: Refer to: p1520, p1521, p1523 Danger: Negative values resulting from the signal source and scaling can cause the motor to accelerate in an uncontrolled manner. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 408 Expert list: 1 Factory setting - [Nm] - [Nm] - [Nm] Description: Display and connector output for the upper torque limit of all torque limits. Dependency: Refer to: p1520, p1521, p1522, p1523, p1528, p1529 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 409 Factory setting 0.00 [kW] 100000.00 [kW] 0.00 [kW] Description: Sets the power limit when motoring. Dependency: Refer to: p0500, p1531 Note: The power limit is limited to 300% of the rated motor power. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 410 - [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms] Description: Displays the minimum limit for the torque-generating current component. Index 0 indicates the signal limited by the Vdc controller. Index: [0] = Limited [1] = Unlimited SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 411 Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Sets the signal source for the scaling of the lower torque limiting to limit the speed controller output. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 412 Sets the signal source to change over the torque limits between variable and fixed torque limit. BI: p1551 = 1 signal: The variable torque limit applies (fixed torque limit + scaling). BI: p1551 = 0 signal: The fixed torque limit applies. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 413 The resulting motoring power limit is the minimum from p1530 and the signal which is read in. The resulting regenerative power limit is the maximum from p1531 and the negative signal which is read in. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 414 Sets the change time for the load torque for the moment of inertia estimator. Lower values mean that faster changes are possible. For a higher value, this estimated value is smoothed more significantly. Dependency: Refer to: p1400, p1560, p1561 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 415 The value is referred to the inverse value of the rated motor frequency. Tv = p1567 / 100 % / p0310 Dependency: Refer to: p1401 Note: The "Dynamic load-dependent flux boost" function can be deactivated using p1401.9 = 0. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 416 (above rated motor torque), if p1580 > 0% has been set. The following applies for a synchronous reluctance motor: The scaling allows the flux setpoint to be adapted when operating with load-dependent optimum flux characteristic or with constant flux setpoint. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 417 In the field weakening range, it must be expected that the control dynamic performance is somewhat restricted due to the limited possibilities of controlling/adjusting the voltage. This can be improved by increasing the voltage reserve. Increasing the reserve reduces the steady-state maximum output voltage (r0071). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 418 Factory setting 20 [ms] 5000 [ms] 200 [ms] Description: Sets the smoothing time for the flux setpoint when decreasing the flux due to flux reduction (p1581 < 100 %). Dependency: Refer to: p1579 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 419 In order to reduce the losses as a result of building-up and reducing the torque, we recommend that the torque setpoint is smoothed (current setpoint filter (p1656 ...) or speed actual value filter (p1441)). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 420 Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, PMSM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting 0 [ms] 1000 [ms] 0 [ms] Description: Sets the smoothing time for the flux actual value. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 421 Sets the integral time for the flux controller. Note: The value is automatically pre-assigned dependent on the motor when the drive system is first commissioned. When calculating controller parameters (p0340 = 4), this value is re-calculated. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 422 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting 10 [ms] 10000 [ms] 50 [ms] Description: Sets the integral-action time of the field-weakening controller. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 423 Sets the proportional gain of the P flux controller for separately excited synchronous motors (SESM). Note: The value is automatically pre-assigned dependent on the motor when the drive system is first commissioned. When calculating controller parameters (p0340 = 4), this value is re-calculated. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 424 See p1750 for the activation of the pulse-pattern technique. Value: ppmm Dependency: Refer to: p1750 Note: When commissioning a catalog motor, the technique is automatically selected depending on the motor type being used. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 425 Expert list: 1 Factory setting 0.00 [Arms] 10000.00 [Arms] 0.00 [Arms] Description: Sets the stator current setpoint for operation of a separately excited synchronous motor (SESM) in operating mode I/f (p1300 = 18). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 426 Dependency: Refer to: p1610, p1611 Note: The value is effective at speeds less than p1755 and represents a reserve for a possibly existing load torque or torque error in the moment of inertia. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 427 Not for motor type: ASM, PMSM, REL Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1 Factory setting - [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms] Description: Displays the pre-control value of the current model controller. It involves a magnetizing current in the d-direction. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 428 Unit group: 6_2 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: PMSM, REL Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1 Factory setting - [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms] Description: Displays the steady-state field generating current setpoint (Id_set). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 429 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, PMSM, REL Scaling: p2005 Expert list: 1 Factory setting - [°] - [°] - [°] Description: Displays the load angle of the current model. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 430 Unit selection: - Not for motor type: ASM, PMSM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting - [ms] - [ms] - [ms] Description: Displays the effective integral time of the current model controller. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 431 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: ASM, PMSM, REL Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1 Factory setting - [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms] Description: Displays the magnetizing current of the current model in the d-axis. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 432 Not for motor type: ASM, PMSM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting 0.1 [%] 50.0 [%] 5.0 [%] Description: Sets the minimum excitation current. This means that negative excitation currents can be avoided. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 433 After the on command for the excitation (r1648.0 = 1), its feedback signal must be available at r1649.1 within this monitoring time (BI: p1645[1]). The same monitoring time is effective after the excitation is enabled for operation (r1648.3 = 1) up to the feedback signal "excitation operational" (r1649.2 = 1, BI: p1645[2]). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 434 0 signal Excitation ready for switching on feedback signal Excitation ready feedback signal Excitation operational feedback signal Excitation group signal fault Excitation group signal alarm Excitation at the voltage limit Dependency: Refer to: p1645 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 435 Sets the signal source for tuning the natural frequency of the current setpoint filter 1, 2 and speed actual value filter 5. Index: [0] = Filter 1 [1] = Filter 2 [2] = Reserved [3] = Reserved [4] = Filter 5 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 436 Expert list: 1 Factory setting 0.001 10.000 0.700 Description: Sets the denominator damping for current setpoint filter 1. Dependency: The current setpoint filter 1 is activated via p1656.0 and parameterized via p1657 ... p1661. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 437 16000.0 [Hz] 1999.0 [Hz] Description: Sets the denominator natural frequency for current setpoint filter 2 (PT2, general filter). Dependency: Current setpoint filter 2 is activated via p1656.1 and parameterized via p1662 ... p1666. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 438 If the numerator damping of zero is selected, the bandstop frequency is completely suppressed. The denominator damping can be determined from the equation for the 3 dB bandwidth: f_3dB bandwidth = 2 * D_denominator * f_bandstop frequency SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 439 Unit selection: - Not for motor type: REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Activates data acceptance for parameter changes for the filter. p1699 = 0: The new filter data are immediately accepted. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 440 Not for motor type: ASM, PMSM, REL Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Factory setting 0.0 [%] 100.0 [%] 100.0 [%] Description: Threshold for the setpoint - actual value tracking of the EMF pre-control of the Isq current controller. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 441 Information in p0300 should be carefully observed when removing write protection. Note: For p1712 = 100 % or p1402.2 = 0, the current controller adaptation is disabled and p1720 is effective over the entire range. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 442 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1 Factory setting - [Vrms] - [Vrms] - [Vrms] Description: Displays the integral component of the Isq current controller (torque/force-generating current, PI controller). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 443 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: REL Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1 Factory setting - [Vrms] - [Vrms] - [Vrms] Description: Displays the limit value for the integral component of the Isd current controller. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 444 Sets the speed threshold for deactivating the integral component of the Isd controller. The d current controller is only effective as P controller for speeds greater than the threshold value. Instead of the integral component, the quadrature arm decoupling is effective. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 445 Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting 0.000 10.000 0.025 Description: Defines the gain of the controller for resonance damping for operation with sensorless vector control in the range that current is injected. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 446 90.0 [%] 50.0 [%] Description: Sets the lower speed for the transition "n_set -> n_act" in encoderless operation. This value is entered as a percentage referred to p1749. Dependency: Refer to: p1749, p1752 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 447 (p2177 > p1758) can cause the motor to stall. In this case you should deactivate the function or use closed- loop control throughout the speed range (note the information re bit 2 = 1). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 448 If bit 2 = 1, then bit 3 is automatically set to 1. Manual de-selection is possible and may be sensible if the saturation characteristic (p1960) was not measured for third-party motors. Generally, for standard SIEMENS motors, the already pre-assigned (default value) saturation characteristic is adequate.
  • Page 449 When changing the motor model changeover speed p1752, the points along the friction characteristic should be recalculated (p0340 = 5) and the friction characteristic recorded again (p3845). For slight changes, only the associated friction characteristic points must be recorded (see p3844). Refer to: p1756 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 450 If the stability is not adequate close to the changeover speed, it may make sense to increase the parameter value. Note: The changeover speed applies for the changeover between open-loop and closed-loop control mode. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 451 In this case, the change is made without any delay. Refer to: p1755, p1756 Note: If p1758 is changed, commissioning must be selected in order to validate the value for the blocking monitoring. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 452 Displays the system deviation for speed adaptation. r1762[0]: Angular deviation [rad-el] of the estimated EMF. r1762[1]: Angular deviation [rad-el] of the low-level signal response for pulse technique. Index: [0] = Deviation model 1 [1] = Deviation model 2 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 453 Unit selection: - Not for motor type: SESM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting 1 [ms] 200 [ms] 4 [ms] Description: Sets the integral time of the controller for speed adaptation without encoder SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 454 Sets the offset voltage in the alpha direction; this compensates the offset voltages of the drive converter/inverter at low speeds. The value is valid for the rated (nominal) pulse frequency of the power unit. Note: The value is pre-set during the rotating measurement. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 455 Displays the difference between the motor model flux angle and the transformation angle. Permanent-magnet synchronous motor (PMSM): Displays the angular difference between motor model and encoder. Dependency: A setting for smoothing the display can be made using p1754. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 456 Bit 11 has no influence on flying restart with speed encoder. Depending on the motor, the fast flying restart is suitable for speeds of maximum 1.5x to 4x the rated motor speed. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 457 (p0826). The display of the inactive data sets is only updated when changing over the data set. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 458 Not for motor type: ASM, SESM, REL Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting 0.000 1000.000 1.000 Description: Sets the proportional gain Kp for speed adaptation with active pulse technique for the estimation of the continuous rotor position. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 459 In this case, the pulse frequency must be a multiple of the inverse value of the current controller sampling time (p0115[0]). If a sine-wave filter is parameterized as output filter (p0230 = 3), then the pulse frequency cannot be changed below the minimum value required for the filter. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 460 Above these output frequencies, the modulation depth remains limited so that there the full output voltage of the edge modulation is not reached. The setting p1802 = 19 is only released for chassis power units and SIMOTICS FD motors. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 461 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1 Factory setting - [V] - [V] - [V] Description: DC link voltage used to determine the maximum possible output voltage. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 462 Bit 1 = 0 can only be set under a pulse inhibit and for r0192.14 = 1. Bit 2 can only be set to 1 subject to the following prerequisites: - Pulse inhibit - r0192.16 = 1 - p1800 < 2 x 1000/p0115[0] SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 463 For U/f control, the overcontrol in p1381 can be separately reduced. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 464 Sets bit 0 for recording the power unit in the subgroup for the "offset clocking". Bit field: Signal name 1 signal 0 signal Recording in subgroup for offset clocking Dependency: Refer to: p1818, p1819 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 465 For the first active power unit, it is specified whether clocking is to start at 0° (value = 0) or 180° (value = 1). All other active power units are clocked alternately according to the setting made here. Dependency: Refer to: p1819 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 466 SDI (Safe Direction) from r9733 no longer functions. Note: This setting can only be changed when the pulses are inhibited. p1821 can be used to reverse the phase sequence and encoder actual value. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 467 0.0 [Vrms] 100.0 [Vrms] 0.6 [Vrms] Description: Sets the threshold voltage drop of the valves (power semiconductor devices) to be compensated. Note: The value is automatically calculated in the motor data identification routine. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 468 If the relevant phase current setpoint falls below the absolute value defined by p1832, the corrective value for this phase is continuously reduced. Dependency: The factory setting of p1832 is automatically set to 0.02 * rated drive converter current (r0207). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 469 Active Not active Reverse the output phase sequence Active Not active CCW dir of rot Active Not active Synchronization (bypass) Active Not active F07801 monitor by application Active Not active Chassis Drive active SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 470 Hardware for the actual value correction detected Automatic shutdown (too many switching instants) Integral scaled to half the gating unit clock cycle freq. Actual value correction temporarily suppressed Reserved Actual value correction active SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 471 [0] = Harmonics phase U [1] = Harmonics phase V [2] = Harmonics phase W [3] = Measured value phase U [4] = Measured value phase V [5] = Measured value phase W SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 472 (p1900 = 1, 3; also refer to p1960); not for p1300 < 20. p1900 = 0: Function inhibited. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 473 If a reluctance motor has been parameterized, a pole position identification is carried out during the stationary measurement. As a consequence, faults that occur can also be assigned to the pole position identification. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 474 If the ground fault test was selected, but not successfully performed, then sufficient current was not be able to be established during the test pulses. For bit 04: A test pulse longer than one sampling time has occurred SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 475 Activate vibration damping Deactivate vibration detection Deactivate pulse measurement Lq Ld Deactivate rotor resistance Rr measurement Deactivate valve interlocking time measurement Determine only stator resistance, valve voltage fault, dead time Short motor identification (lower quality) SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 476 - current flows through the motor and a voltage is present at the drive converter output terminals. - during the identification routine, the motor shaft can rotate through a maximum of half a revolution. - however, no torque torque is generated. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 477 Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting - [ms] - [ms] - [ms] Description: Displays the identified rotor time constant. Index: [0] = Phase U [1] = Phase V [2] = Phase W SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 478 - [mH] - [mH] - [mH] Description: Displays the stator inductance identified for the 2nd point of the saturation characteristic. Index: [0] = Phase U [1] = Phase V [2] = Phase W SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 479 Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting - [mH] - [mH] - [mH] Description: Displays the identified dynamic leakage inductance 1. Index: [0] = Phase U [1] = Phase V [2] = Phase W SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 480 Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting - [Vrms] - [Vrms] - [Vrms] Description: Displays the identified IGBT threshold voltage. Index: [0] = Phase U [1] = Phase V [2] = Phase W SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 481 Refer to: r1935, p1959, p1960 Note: The Lq characteristic consists of the value pairs from p1934 and p1935 with the same index. This value corresponds to the value of the total leakage inductance (r0377). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 482 For bit 12 = 1: The selection only has an effect on the measurement p1960 = 1, 2. For the shortened measurement, the magnetizing current and moment of inertia are determined with a somewhat lower accuracy. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 483 (p1464, p1465). If the drive should be controlled with as well as without speed encoder, then we recommend the use of two drive data sets (p0180). These can then be executed with different speed controller adaptations. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 484 Displays the magnetizing inductances of the identified saturation characteristic. The values are referred to r0382. Index: [0] = Value 1 [1] = Value 2 [2] = Value 3 [3] = Value 4 [4] = Value 5 Dependency: Refer to: r0382 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 485 (p1967), then this can be as a result of mechanical load oscillations. If, in spite of this load behavior, a higher dynamic response is required, then the oscillation test (p1959.4 = 0) should be deactivated and the measurement repeated. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 486 Displays the standard deviations of the vibration frequencies determined by the vibration test Index: [0] = Standard deviation of low frequency [1] = Standard deviation of high frequency Dependency: Refer to: p1959 Refer to: F07985 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 487 Moment of inertia identification active Recalc. speed controller parameters active Speed controller vibration test active Magnetizing inductance adapt. active Operation with encoder after encoderless operation q-leakage inductance identification Moment of inertia estimator inhibited SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 488 For separately excited synchronous motors, the position identification is realized using the voltage measurement of a Voltage Sensing Module VSM (p1980 = 12). If there is no VSM then the setting is not possible. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 489 The following information and data can be taken from the trigger characteristic. - the value -100% marks the angle at the start of the measurement. - the value +100 % marks the commutation angle determined from the pole position identification routine. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 490 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting 0.0000 [A] 10000.0000 [A] 0.0000 [A] Description: Current offset determined to measure the speed (RESM) Dependency: Refer to: p1980, p1982, r1984, r1985, r1987, p1990 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 491 All frequencies specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity. The reference quantity corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex (word) or 4000 0000 hex (double word). The following applies: Reference frequency (in Hz) SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 492 The actual value of the DC link voltage (r0070) is connected to a test socket (e.g. p0771[0]). The actual voltage value is cyclically converted into a percentage of the reference voltage (p2001) and output according to the parameterized scaling. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 493 Pre-assigned value for p0338 and p0334 > 0.001 is p0338 * p0334, otherwise 2 * p0333. VECTOR: Pre-assigned value is 2 * p0333. If a BICO interconnection is established between different physical quantities, then the particular reference quantities are used as internal conversion factor. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 494 Sets the reference quantity for temperature. All temperatures specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity. The reference quantity corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex (word) or 4000 0000 hex (double word). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 495 Fieldbus IF: Fieldbus interface Changes only become effective after POWER ON. The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting. The parameter is set to the factory setting when the protocol is reselected. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 496 Sets the number of 16-bit words in the PKW part of the USS telegram for the field bus interface. Value: PKW 0 words PKW 3 words PKW 4 words 127: PKW variable Dependency: Refer to: p2030 Note: The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 497 Factory setting Description: Sets the communication protocol for the field bus interface. Value: PROFIBUS USS (X140) Note: Changes only become effective after POWER ON. The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 498 Acknowledge fault Master control by PLC Notice: The master control only influences control word 1 and speed setpoint 1. Other control word/setpoints can be transferred from another automation device. Note: OC: Operating condition SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 499 The parameter is protected and cannot be changed. Note: For telegram selection p0922 (p2079) = 20, then p2038 is automatically set = 2. When another telegram is selected, then p2038 is automatically set = 0. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 500 SINAMICS can be operated with various identities on PROFIBUS. This allows the use of a PROFIBUS GSD that is independent of the device (e.g. PROFIdrive VIK-NAMUR with ident number 3AA0 hex). Value: SINAMICS VIK-NAMUR Note: Every change only becomes effective after a POWER ON. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 501 Enables short bus faults to be compensated. If no process data is received within this time, then an appropriate message is output. Recommendation: In the isochronous mode, the additional monitoring time should not be set. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 502 Connector output to interconnect PZD (setpoints) with word format received from the fieldbus controller. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 503 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 [6] = PZD 7 [7] = PZD 8 [8] = PZD 9 [9] = PZD 10 Note: IF1: Interface 1 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 504 [6] = PZD 7 [7] = PZD 8 [8] = PZD 9 [9] = PZD 10 [10] = PZD 11 [11] = PZD 12 [12] = PZD 13 [13] = PZD 14 [14] = PZD 15 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 505 [30] = PZD 31 [31] = PZD 32 Dependency: Refer to: p2061 Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. Note: IF1: Interface 1 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 506 [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 [6] = PZD 7 [7] = PZD 8 [8] = PZD 9 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 507 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 Note: IF1: Interface 1 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 508 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 Dependency: Refer to: p2051, p2061 Note: IF1: Interface 1 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 509 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 Bit field: Signal name 1 signal 0 signal Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 510 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 Bit 15 Dependency: Refer to: p2051, p2061 Note: IF1: Interface 1 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 511 Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Displays the setting of the PROFIBUS address switch "DP ADDRESS" on the Control Unit. Dependency: Refer to: p0918 Notice: The display is updated after switching on, and not cyclically. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 512 Connector output to interconnect PZD (setpoints) with double word format received from the fieldbus controller. Index: [0] = PZD 1 + 2 [1] = PZD 2 + 3 [2] = PZD 3 + 4 Dependency: Refer to: r2050 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 513 Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Selects the PZD (actual values) with double word format to be sent to the fieldbus controller. Index: [0] = PZD 1 + 2 [1] = PZD 2 + 3 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 514 [29] = PZD 30 + 31 [30] = PZD 31 + 32 Bit field: Signal name 1 signal 0 signal Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 515 1 signal 0 signal Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 Bit 11 Bit 12 Bit 13 Bit 14 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 516 Factory setting Description: Displays how often the sign-of-life from the clock synchronous PROFIBUS/PROFINET controller last failed. An appropriate fault is output when the tolerance, specified in p0925, is exceeded. Dependency: Refer to: F01912 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 517 Factory setting 0000 bin Description: Sets the response for the receive value (r2090) after PZD failure. Bit field: Signal name 1 signal 0 signal Unconditionally open holding brake (p0855) Freeze value Zero the value SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 518 [9] = PZD 10 [10] = PZD 11 [11] = PZD 12 [12] = PZD 13 [13] = PZD 14 [14] = PZD 15 [15] = PZD 16 [16] = PZD 17 [17] = PZD 18 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 519 Displays the PROFIBUS address of the sender from which the process data (PZD) is received. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 520 [15] = PZD 16 [16] = PZD 17 [17] = PZD 18 [18] = PZD 19 [19] = PZD 20 Note: IF1: Interface 1 Value range: 0 - 242: Byte offset 65535: Not assigned SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 521 Displays the PZD byte offset in the PROFIdrive receive telegram (controller output). Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 522 Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Displays the PZD byte offset in the PROFIdrive send telegram (controller input). Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 523 [19] = PZD 20 [20] = PZD 21 [21] = PZD 22 [22] = PZD 23 [23] = PZD 24 [24] = PZD 25 [25] = PZD 26 [26] = PZD 27 [27] = PZD 28 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 524 [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 Note: IF1: Interface 1 Value range: 0 - 242: Byte offset 65535: Not assigned SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 525 Factory setting Description: Sets the send and receive telegram. Contrary to p0922, a telegram can be selected using p2079 and subsequently expanded. Value: 390: SIEMENS telegram 390, PZD-2/2 391: SIEMENS telegram 391, PZD-3/7 392: SIEMENS telegram 392, PZD-3/15 393: SIEMENS telegram 393, PZD-4/21...
  • Page 526 Contrary to p0922, a telegram can be selected using p2079 and subsequently expanded. Value: Standard telegram 1, PZD-2/2 Standard telegram 2, PZD-4/4 Standard telegram 20, PZD-2/6 220: SIEMENS telegram 220, PZD-10/10 352: SIEMENS telegram 352, PZD-6/6 999: Free telegram configuration with BICO Dependency:...
  • Page 527 Factory setting Description: Sets the send and receive telegram. Contrary to p0922, a telegram can be selected using p2079 and subsequently expanded. Value: 370: SIEMENS telegram 370, PZD-1/1 371: SIEMENS telegram 371, PZD-5/8 999: Free telegram configuration with BICO Dependency:...
  • Page 528 Selects bits to be sent to the PROFIdrive controller. The individual bits are combined to form free status word 3. Index: [0] = Bit 0 [1] = Bit 1 [2] = Bit 2 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 529 Index: [0] = Bit 0 [1] = Bit 1 [2] = Bit 2 [3] = Bit 3 [4] = Bit 4 [5] = Bit 5 [6] = Bit 6 [7] = Bit 7 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 530 [1] = Status word 2 [2] = Free status word 3 [3] = Free status word 4 [4] = Free status word 5 Bit field: Signal name 1 signal 0 signal Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 531 Description: Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of PZD2 received from the PROFIdrive controller. Bit field: Signal name 1 signal 0 signal Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 532 Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of PZD4 (normally control word 2) received from the PROFIdrive controller. Bit field: Signal name 1 signal 0 signal Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 533 The PZD is selected via p2099[1]. Bit field: Signal name 1 signal 0 signal Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 534 From the signal source set via the connector input, the corresponding lower 16 bits are converted. p2099[0...1] together with r2094.0...15 and r2095.0...15 forms two connector-binector converters: Connector input p2099[0] to binector output in r2094.0...15 Connector input p2099[1] to binector output in r2095.0...15 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 535 For the following cases, it is not possible to re-parameterize the fault response to a fault: - fault number does not exist (exception value = 0). - Message type is not "fault" (F). - fault response is not permissible for the set fault number. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 536 Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Sets the signal source to acknowledge all faults at all drive objects of the drive system. Note: A fault acknowledgment is triggered with a 0/1 signal. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 537 Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Sets the second signal source to acknowledge faults. Note: A fault acknowledgment is triggered with a 0/1 signal. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 538 Sets the signal source for external fault 1. Dependency: Refer to: F07860 Note: An external fault is triggered with a 0 signal. If this fault is output at the Control Unit, then it is transferred to all existing drive objects. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 539 Refer to: p3110, p3111, p3112 Refer to: F07862 Note: An external fault is triggered with a 0 signal. If this fault is output at the Control Unit, then it is transferred to all existing drive objects. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 540 - all of the alarms of the alarm buffer that have gone [0...7] are transferred into the alarm history [8...63]. - the alarm buffer [0...7] is deleted. Refer to: r2110, r2122, r2123, r2124, r2125 Note: The parameter is reset to 0 at POWER ON. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 541 Expert list: 1 TM120, TM150, TB30, TM54F_MA, Factory setting TM54F_SL, ENC, HUB Description: Sets the signal source for external alarm 2. Dependency: Refer to: A07851 Note: An external alarm is triggered with a 0 signal. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 542 Selects the fault or alarm selection and sets the required type of message realized under the same index. Refer to: p2119 Note: Re-parameterization is also possible if a message is present. The change only becomes effective after the message has gone. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 543 Displays the number of alarms that have occurred. Dependency: Refer to: r2110, r2123, r2124, r2125, r2134, r2145, r2146, r3121, r3123 Notice: The properties of the alarm buffer should be taken from the corresponding product documentation. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 544 The time comprises r2146 (days) and r2125 (milliseconds). Note: The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background (refer to status signal in r2139). The structure of the alarm buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r2122. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 545 Description: Sets the faults/alarms for which a trigger signal should be generated in r2129.0...15. Dependency: If the fault/alarm set in p2128[0...15] occurs, then the particular binector output r2129.0...15 is set. Refer to: r2129 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 546 Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Displays the code of the oldest active fault. Dependency: Refer to: r3131, r3132 Note: 0: No fault present. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 547 1 signal 0 signal Fault encoder 1 Fault encoder 2 Fault encoder 3 Fault motor overtemperature 8016 Fault power unit thermal overload 8021 Alarm motor overtemperature 8016 Alarm power unit thermal overload 8021 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 548 These bits are set if at least one fault/alarm occurs. Data is entered into the fault/alarm buffer with delay. This is the reason that the fault/alarm buffer should only be read if, after "fault present" or "alarm present" has occurred, a change in the buffer was also detected (r0944, r9744, r2121). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 549 Refer to: p2163, p2164, p2166, r2197, r2198 Refer to: F07900 Note: When interconnecting the enable signal with r2197.7 then the stall signal is suppressed if there is no speed setpoint - actual value deviation. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 550 Sets the signal source for the signal "ramp-function generator active" for the following signals/messages: "Speed setpoint - actual value deviation within tolerance t_on" (BO: r2199.4) "Ramp-up/ramp-down completed" (BO: r2199.5) Notice: The parameter may be protected as a result of p0922 or p2079 and cannot be changed. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 551 Sets the hysteresis speed (bandwidth) for the following signals: "|n_act| < speed threshold value 3" (BO: r2199.0) "n_set >= 0" (BO: r2198.5) "n_act >= 0" (BO: r2197.3) Dependency: Refer to: p2161, r2197, r2199 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 552 0.00 [rpm] 210000.00 [rpm] 900.00 [rpm] Description: Sets the speed threshold value for the following messages: "|n_act| < = speed threshold value 2" (BO: r2197.1) "|n_act| > speed threshold value 2" (BO: r2197.2) SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 553 Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting 0.00 [rpm] 60000.00 [rpm] 0.00 [rpm] Description: Sets the hysteresis speed (bandwidth) for the signal "n_act > n_max" (BO: r2197.6). Dependency: Refer to: r1084, r1087, r2197 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 554 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting 0.0 [ms] 10000.0 [ms] 200.0 [ms] Description: Sets the switch-on delay for the "speed setpoint - actual value deviation in tolerance t_on" signal/message (BO: r2199.4). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 555 Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting 0.000 [s] 65.000 [s] 1.000 [s] Description: Sets the delay time for the message "Motor blocked" (BO: r2198.6). Dependency: Refer to: p0500, p2175, r2198 Refer to: F07900 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 556 Refer to: p2183, p2184, p2185, p2186 Refer to: A07926 Note: In order that the load monitoring can reliably respond, the speed threshold p2182 should always be set lower than the minimum motor speed to be monitored. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 557 Sets the speed/torque / velocity/force envelope curve for the load monitoring. Dependency: The following applies: p2185 > p2186 Refer to: p2182, p2186 Refer to: A07926 Note: The upper envelope curve is defined by p2185, p2187 and p2189. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 558 Sets the speed/torque / velocity/force envelope curve for the load monitoring. Dependency: The following applies: p2189 > p2190 Refer to: p2184, p2190 Refer to: A07926 Note: The upper envelope curve is defined by p2185, p2187 and p2189. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 559 Sets the switch-off delay time for the negated signal "run-up completed". The message "torque setpoint < p2174" (BO: r2198.10) and "torque utilization < p2194" (BO: r2199.11) are only evaluated after the run-up and the delay time has expired. Dependency: Refer to: p2174, p2194 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 560 The hysteresis is set in p2162. For bit 07: The threshold value is set in p2163 and the hysteresis is set in p2164. For bit 13: Only for internal Siemens use. r2198.4...12 CO/BO: Status word monitoring 2 / ZSW monitor 2 VECTOR_G...
  • Page 561 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Sets the signal source to switch in/switch out the technology controller. The technology controller is switched in with a 1 signal. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 562 Sets the value for fixed value 4 of the technology controller. Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229 Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 563 Sets the value for fixed value 8 of the technology controller. Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229 Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 564 Sets the value for fixed value 12 of the technology controller. Dependency: Refer to: p2220, p2221, p2222, p2223, r2224, r2229 Notice: A BICO interconnection to a parameter that belongs to a drive data set always acts on the effective data set. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 565 P-Group: Technology Unit group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Sets the method to select the fixed setpoints. Value: Direct selection Binary selection SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 566 Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Factory setting - [%] - [%] - [%] Description: Display and connector output for the selected and active fixed value of the technology controller. Dependency: Refer to: r2229 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 567 The selected ramp-up/down time is correspondingly exceeded. The initial rounding-off is a sensitive way of specifying small changes (progressive reaction when keys are pressed). The jerk for initial rounding is independent of the ramp-up time and only depends on the selected maximum value (p2237). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 568 Sets the signal source to continually reduce the setpoint for the motorized potentiometer of the technology controller. The setpoint change (CO: r2250) depends on the set ramp-down time (p2248) and the duration of the signal that is present (BI: p2236). Dependency: Refer to: p2235 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 569 Expert list: 1 Factory setting - [%] - [%] - [%] Description: Sets the effective setpoint in front of the internal motorized potentiometer ramp-function generator of the technology controller. Dependency: Refer to: r2250 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 570 Sets the configuration of the technology controller. Bit field: Signal name 1 signal 0 signal Ramp-up/down time independent of setpoint sign Integrator independent of Kp Output signal without ramp active Act value limit SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 571 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting 0.00 [%] 100.00 [%] 100.00 [%] Description: Sets the scaling for the setpoint 1 of the technology controller. Dependency: Refer to: p2253 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 572 Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting 0.000 [s] 60.000 [s] 0.000 [s] Description: Sets the time constant for the setpoint filter (PT1) of the technology controller. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 573 Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Factory setting - [%] - [%] - [%] Description: Display and connector output for the smoothed actual value after the filter (PT1) of the technology controller. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 574 Setting to use an arithmetic function for the actual value signal of the technology controller. Value: Output (y) = input (x) Root function (root from x) Square function (x * x) Cube function (x * x * x) Dependency: Refer to: p2264, p2265, p2267, p2268, p2269, p2271 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 575 Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting 0.000 [s] 60.000 [s] 0.000 [s] Description: Sets the time constant for the differentiation (D component) of the technology controller. Note: p2274 = 0: Differentiation is disabled. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 576 -200.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 100.00 [%] Description: Sets the maximum limit of the technology controller. Dependency: Refer to: p2292 Caution: The maximum limit must always be greater than the minimum limit (p2291 > p2292). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 577 Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Factory setting 2295[0] Description: Sets the signal source for the scaling value of the technology controller. Dependency: Refer to: p2295 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 578 The drive reduces the output speed when the actual value rises (e.g. for heating fans, intake pump, compressor). If value = 1: The drive increases the output speed when the actual value increases (e.g. for cooling fans, discharge pumps). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 579 The reference quantity corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex (word) or 4000 0000 hex (double word). This parameter has the unit rpm. The following applies: Reference frequency (in Hz) = reference speed (in rpm) / 60 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 580 All voltages specified as relative value are referred to this reference quantity. The reference quantity corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex (word) or 4000 0000 hex (double word). This parameter has the unit Vrms. Dependency: Refer to: p2001 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 581 The unit of this parameter is the same as the unit selected for p2004. Dependency: This value is calculated as voltage x current for the infeed and as torque x speed for closed-loop controls. Refer to: r2004 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 582 The reference quantity corresponds to 100% or 4000 hex (word) or 4000 0000 hex (double word). The unit of this parameter is the same as the unit selected for p2007. Dependency: r0108.12, p0505 Refer to: p2007 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 583 Difference within the tolerance window --> The position is reproduced as a result of the encoder actual value. Difference outside the tolerance window --> An appropriate message is output. Dependency: Refer to: F07449 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 584 Sets the signal sources for the inputs of the AND logic operation. Dependency: Refer to: r2811 Note: [0]: AND logic operation, input 1 --> the result is displayed in r2811.0. [1]: AND logic operation, input 2 --> the result is displayed in r2811.0. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 585 [3] = NOT logic operation 3 input Dependency: Refer to: r2823 Note: [0]: NOT logic operation 0 --> result is displayed in r2823.0. [1]: NOT logic operation 1 --> result is displayed in r2823.1. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 586 Display and connector output for frequently used percentage values. Index: [0] = Fixed value +0 % [1] = Fixed value +5 % [2] = Fixed value +10 % [3] = Fixed value +20 % SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 587 [1] = d-flux iq0 [2] = d-flux iq1 [3] = d-flux iq2 [4] = d-current error iq0 [5] = d-current error iq1 [6] = d-current error iq2 Note: RESM: reluctance synchronous motor (synchronous reluctance motor) SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 588 Unit selection: - CU_G150_DP Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Displaying the current UTC time. Index: [0] = Milliseconds [1] = Days Dependency: Refer to: p3100 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 589 [2] = Milliseconds before sync [3] = Days before sync Dependency: Refer to: p3109 Refer to: A01099 Note: For r3107[0, 1]: Displays the UTC time after synchronization. For 3107[2, 3]: Displays the UTC time before synchronization. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 590 Sets the signal source for the enable signal of external fault 3. External fault 3 is initiated by the following AND logic operation: - BI: p2108 negated - BI: p3111 - BI: p3112 negated Dependency: Refer to: p2108, p3110, p3112 Refer to: F07862 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 591 Sets the signal source for the negated enable signal of external fault 3. External fault 3 is initiated by the following AND logic operation: - BI: p2108 negated - BI: p3111 - BI: p3112 negated Dependency: Refer to: p2108, p3110, p3111 Refer to: F07862 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 592 Check the encoder / state of the encoder signals. Observe the maximum frequencies. For bit 10: The internal communication between the SINAMICS components is faulted or interrupted. Check the DRIVE-CLiQ wiring. Ensure an EMC-compliant design. Observe the maximum permissible quantity structure / clock cycles. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 593 Control Unit faults with LOCAL propagation are not passed on. Dependency: Refer to: p2102, p2103, p2104, p2105, p3981 Note: When selecting a standard telegram, the BICO interconnection for control signal STW1.10 (master control by PLC) is automatically established. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 594 Factory setting Description: Displays the diagnostic attribute of the fault which has occurred. Bit field: Signal name 1 signal 0 signal Hardware replacement recommended Message has gone PROFIdrive fault class bit 0 High SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 595 PROFIdrive fault class bit 1 High PROFIdrive fault class bit 2 High PROFIdrive fault class bit 3 High PROFIdrive fault class bit 4 High Dependency: Refer to: r2110, r2122, r2123, r2124, r2125, r2134, r2145, r2146, r3121 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 596 Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Displays the component number of the oldest fault that is still active. Dependency: Refer to: r2131, r3131 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 597 Sets the hysteresis for the "excitation current outside tolerance" message for the excitation current monitoring. Dependency: Refer to: p3201, p3203 Refer to: F07913 Note: The monitoring function is only carried out for separately excited synchronized motors (p0300 = 5). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 598 Refer to: p3204, p3206 Refer to: F07914 Note: The monitoring function is only carried out for separately excited synchronized motors (p0300 = 5). The flux monitoring is only active after magnetizing (r0056.4 = 1). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 599 The monitoring function is only carried out for separately excited synchronized motors (p0300 = 5). The monitoring is only carried out for speeds less than the speed threshold value in p2161 (r2199.0 = 1). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 600 Expert list: 1 Factory setting 0.00 [rpm] 3000.00 [rpm] 100.00 [rpm] Description: Sets the speed threshold value for the signal "speed deviation model/external in tolerance" (BO: r2199.7). Dependency: Refer to: r1443, r2169, r2199, p3237 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 601 The integrator value in r3244 decreases if the value received via connector input p3240 is higher than the value set in p3241. The integrator value in r3244 increases if the value received via connector input p3240 is less than the value set in p3241. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 602 Display and connector output for the actual integrator value of the freely parameterizable I2t monitoring. The value is scaled, so that the maximum permissible overload is reached at 100 %. Dependency: Refer to: p3240, p3241, p3242, p3243 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 603 For the energy-saving display of a fluid-flow machine, a typical flow characteristic P = f(n) with 5 points along the characteristic is required. This parameter specifies the power (P) of point 2 as a [%]. Dependency: Refer to: r0041, p3320, p3321, p3323, p3324, p3325, p3326, p3327, p3328, p3329 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 604 Dependency: Refer to: r0041, p3320, p3321, p3322, p3323, p3324, p3326, p3327, p3328, p3329 Note: The reference value for power and speed is the rated power/rated speed. The energy saved is displayed in r0041. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 605 For the energy-saving display of a fluid-flow machine, a typical flow characteristic P = f(n) with 5 points along the characteristic is required. This parameter specifies the speed (n) of point 5 as a [%]. Dependency: Refer to: r0041, p3320, p3321, p3322, p3323, p3324, p3325, p3326, p3327, p3328 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 606 The alarm threshold is obtained from the sum of the undervoltage threshold p0296 and offset r0279. As a consequence, the alarm threshold is only effective for p0279 > 0. Monitoring only takes place when operational. The following applies for states r3402 <= 5 and r3402 = 12: r3405.7 = 0. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 607 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Sets the signal source for the supplementary setpoint for the DC link voltage on the motor side. Dependency: Refer to: p3510 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 608 A non-scaled quantity is expected so that the various power reference values (r2004) of the drive objects do not have to be taken into account. The scaling factors are used to adapt the scaling (p3521). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 609 Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1 Factory setting - [Arms] - [Arms] - [Arms] Description: Display of the DC link voltage controller output (Vdc controller). Index: [0] = I output [1] = PI output SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 610 Displays the input voltage between phases L1 and L2 for the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM). Dependency: Refer to: p3660 Note: X521.1 or X522.1: Connection of L1 X521.2 or X522.2: Connection of L2 X521.3 or X522.3: Connection of L3 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 611 Display and connector output for the temperature actual value of a temperature sensor connected to a Voltage Sensing Module (VSM). Prerequisite: A KTY/ PT1000 temperature sensor is connected, and correspondingly 3665 is set = 2, 6. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 612 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2006 Expert list: 1 Factory setting 1.00 [K] 50.00 [K] 3.00 [K] Description: Sets the hysteresis for the alarm threshold of the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM). Dependency: Refer to: p3667 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 613 Displays the actual value of the voltage measured at the 10 V input 1 of the Voltage Sensing Module (VSM). Dependency: Refer to: p3670 Note: 10 V input 1: Terminals X520.1 and X520.2 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 614 Refer to: F30027 Notice: The parameter is only effective for Basic Line Modules with the internal Braking Module (this is valid for Basic Line Modules with a power rating of less than 100 kW). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 615 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: The binector output uses a 1 signal to indicate an overcurrent fault or an I2t shutdown in the Braking Module. Dependency: Refer to: F06906 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 616 Line synchronization (first VSM connected with the line supply) and also flying restart (second VSM connected to the motor terminals) can only be used if two VSMs are assigned to the Motor Module. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 617 Factory setting Description: Displays the control word for the line-drive synchronization. Bit field: Signal name 1 signal 0 signal Sync-line-drive selected Note: For bit 00: For a 1 signal, p3800 > 0 is set. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 618 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting -180.00 [°] 179.90 [°] 0.00 [°] Description: Sets the phase setpoint for the line-drive synchronization. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 619 20.00 [%] 10.00 [%] Description: Sets the threshold value of the voltage difference for the line-drive synchronization. A prerequisite for synchronism is reached if the voltage difference is less than the threshold value. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 620 210000.00 [rpm] 30.00 [rpm] Description: The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs. This parameter specifies the n coordinate of the 2nd value pair of the friction characteristic. Dependency: Refer to: p3831, p3845 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 621 210000.00 [rpm] 300.00 [rpm] Description: The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs. This parameter specifies the n coordinate of the 6th value pair of the friction characteristic. Dependency: Refer to: p3835, p3845 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 622 210000.00 [rpm] 3000.00 [rpm] Description: The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs. This parameter specifies the n coordinate of the 10th value pair of the friction characteristic. Dependency: Refer to: p3839, p3845 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 623 1000000.0000 [Nm] 0.0000 [Nm] Description: The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs. This parameter specifies the M coordinate of the 4th value pair of the friction characteristic. Dependency: Refer to: p3823, p3845 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 624 1000000.0000 [Nm] 0.0000 [Nm] Description: The friction characteristic is defined by 10 value pairs. This parameter specifies the M coordinate of the 8th value pair of the friction characteristic. Dependency: Refer to: p3827, p3845 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 625 The frictional torque is calculated from the characteristic values from the characteristic point entered into p3844. The following applies for bit 9 = 1 (current model active): The frictional torque is calculated from the characteristic values below the characteristic point entered into p3844. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 626 Dependency: As part of the automatic calculation (p0340), p3844 is only activated for closed loop control (p1300 = 21, 23) of induction motors with encoder. Refer to: p3843 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 627 Sets the warm-up time. For an automatic trace (record) to start, the highest selected speed (p3829) is approached and this time is held. After this, the measurement is started with the highest speed. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 628 Sets the delay time for switching in the DC link fast discharge. Dependency: Refer to: p3863, r3864 Note: The DC link fast discharge is only possible for "booksize" formats. This function is not supported for "chassis" formats. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 629 (incorrect function) via binector outputs BO: p3864.n or could also permanently control the DC link fast discharge even if the line contactor is closed. Note: The DC link fast discharge is only possible for "booksize" formats. This function is not supported for "chassis" formats. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 630 BI: p3880 = 0 signal: The essential service mode is deactivated. Dependency: The function can only be activated for SINAMICS G130/G150/S150. Refer to: p3881, p3882, p3883, p3886, r3887, p3888, r3889 Warning: When activating the essential service mode (BI: p3880 = 1 signal), the motor immediately runs according to the selected setpoint source.
  • Page 631 Last known setpoint (r1078 smoothed) Fixed speed setpoint 15 (p1015) Maximum speed (p1082) Dependency: Refer to: p3881 Note: ESM: Essential Service Mode The alternative setpoint source is only active for p3881 = 3, 5. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 632 Setting to reset the number of activations and faults that have occurred for the essential service mode (ESM). 1: counter reset active (r3887[0, 1]) 0: inactive Dependency: Refer to: r3887 Note: ESM: Essential Service Mode The parameter is automatically reset to zero after the counter has been reset. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 633 When calculating motor, open-loop and closed-loop control parameters (such as for p0340 = 1) parameters associated with a selected Siemens catalog motor are not overwritten. If a catalog motor has not been selected (p0300), then the following parameters are reset with p3900 > 0 in order to restore the situation that applied when commissioning the drive for the first time: induction motors p0320, p0352, p0353, p0362 ...
  • Page 634 = 1, p3900 > 0) Motor data identification carried out at standstill (p1910 = 1) Rotating measurement carried out (p1960 = 1, 2) Motor encoder adjustment carried out (p1960 = 1, p1990 = 1, 3) SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 635 Calibrating the output voltage measurement Yes Only identify circle Deactivate circle identification Circle identification with 0 and 90 degrees Deactivate gating unit switchover Dependency: Refer to: r3925 Note: The parameter is a copy of p1909. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 636 Dyn. index: - Func. diagram: - CU_G130_DP, P-Group: All groups Unit group: - Unit selection: - CU_G150_DP Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: For service personnel only. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 637 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Displays the counter reading for modified BICO interconnections on this drive object. The counter is incremented by one for each modified BICO interconnection. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 638 Factory setting 10800 Description: Index 0: Displays the boot state. Index 1: Displays the partial boot state Value: Not active Fatal fault Fault Reset all parameters Drive object modified Download using commissioning software SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 639 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Displays whether writing to parameters is inhibited. r3996[0] = 0: Parameter write not inhibited. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 640 Parameter write inhibited. The value shows how the calculations are progressing. Index: [0] = Progress calculations [1] = Cause Note: For index 1: Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. r3998[0...n] First drive commissioning / First drv_comm VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: -...
  • Page 641 High DI 7 (X530.4) High DI/DO 8 (X541.2) High DI/DO 9 (X541.3) High DI/DO 10 (X541.4) High DI/DO 11 (X541.5) High Dependency: Refer to: r4023 Note: DI: Digital Input DI/DO: Bidirectional Digital Input/Output SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 642 Displays the inverted status of the digital inputs of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30). Bit field: Signal name 1 signal 0 signal DI 0 (X481.1) High DI 1 (X481.2) High DI 2 (X481.3) High DI 3 (X481.4) High SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 643 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Sets the signal source for digital output DO 0 (X481.5) of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30). Note: DO: Digital Output SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 644 Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Sets the signal source for terminal DO 3 (X481.8) of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30). Note: DO: Digital Output SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 645 Factory setting Description: Sets the signal source for terminal DI/DO 11 (X541.5) of Terminal Module 31 (TM31). Note: Prerequisite: The DI/DO must be set as an output (p4028.11 = 1). DI/DO: Bidirectional Digital Input/Output SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 646 Signal name 1 signal 0 signal DO 0 (X481.5) High DO 1 (X481.6) High DO 2 (X481.7) High DO 3 (X481.8) High Note: Inversion using p4048 has been taken into account. DO: Digital Output SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 647 [0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0) [1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1) Dependency: The type of analog input AI x (voltage or current input) is set using p4056. Refer to: r4056, p4056 Note: AI: Analog Input SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 648 Displays the currently referred input value of the analog inputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31). When interconnected, the signals are referred to the reference quantities p200x and p205x. Index: [0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0) [1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1) Note: AI: Analog Input SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 649 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Displays the type of analog inputs. Value: Bipolar voltage input (-10 V ... +10 V) SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 650 [0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0) [1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1) Notice: This parameter is automatically overwritten when the analog input type (p4056) is modified. Note: The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 651 This parameter specifies the x coordinate (input voltage in V) of the 2nd value pair of the characteristic. Index: [0] = AI 0 (X482.1/X482.2) [1] = AI 1 (X482.3/X482.4) Note: The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 652 [1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1) Dependency: For the following analog input type, the wire breakage monitoring is active: p4056[x] = 3 (unipolar current input monitored (+4 mA ... +20 mA)) Refer to: r4056, p4056 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 653 Activates the absolute value generation for the analog input signals of Terminal Module 31 (TM31). Value: No absolute value generation Absolute value generation switched in Index: [0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0) [1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1) SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 654 Sets the noise suppression window of the analog inputs for Terminal Module 31 (TM31). Changes less than the window are suppressed. Index: [0] = AI 0 (X521.1/X521.2, S5.0) [1] = AI 1 (X521.3/X521.4, S5.1) Note: AI: Analog Input SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 655 Description: Sets the signal source for the analog outputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31). Index: [0] = AO 0 (X522.1, X522.2, X522.3) [1] = AO 1 (X522.4, X522.5, X522.6) Note: AO: Analog Output SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 656 Sets the smoothing time constant of the 1st order lowpass filter for the analog outputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31). Index: [0] = AO 0 (X522.1, X522.2, X522.3) [1] = AO 1 (X522.4, X522.5, X522.6) SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 657 Activates the absolute value generation for the analog outputs of Terminal Module 31 (TM31). Value: No absolute value generation Absolute value generation switched in Index: [0] = AO 0 (X522.1, X522.2, X522.3) [1] = AO 1 (X522.4, X522.5, X522.6) SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 658 Factory setting Description: Displays the type of analog outputs of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30). Value: Voltage output (-10 V ... +10 V) Index: [0] = AO 0 (X482.5/X482.6) [1] = AO 1 (X482.7/X482.8) SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 659 The unit of this parameter (V or mA) depends on the analog output type. Refer to: r4076, p4076 Notice: This parameter is automatically overwritten when changing p4076 (type of analog outputs). Note: The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 660 This parameter specifies the x coordinate (percentage) of the 2nd value pair of the characteristic. Index: [0] = AO 0 (X482.5/X482.6) [1] = AO 1 (X482.7/X482.8) Note: The parameters for the characteristic do not have a limiting effect. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 661 Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Sets the signal source for inverting the analog output signals of the Terminal Board 30 (TB30). Index: [0] = AO 0 (X482.5/X482.6) [1] = AO 1 (X482.7/X482.8) SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 662 The setpoint for the input signals is specified using p4096. Refer to: p4096 Warning: A drive that is moved by simulating the inputs of a Terminal Module is brought to a standstill while the Terminal Module is being activated or deactivated. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 663 Dependency: The simulation of a digital input is selected using p4095. Refer to: p4095 Note: This parameter is not saved when data is backed-up (p0971, p0977). DI: Digital Input DI/DO: Bidirectional Digital Input/Output SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 664 [1] = AI 1 (X482.3/X482.4) Dependency: The setpoint for the input voltage is specified via p4098. Refer to: p4098 Note: This parameter is not saved when data is backed-up (p0971, p0977). AI: Analog Input SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 665 Refer to: p0009, r0110, r0111 Notice: The sampling times entered in index 0 (digital inputs/outputs) and index 2 (analog outputs) must always be greater than or equal to the sampling time in index 1 (analog inputs). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 666 The temperature sensors are connected to the following terminals: X521.2(+) and X521.1(-) = channel 0 X521.4(+) and X521.3(-) = channel 1 X521.6(+) and X521.5(-) = channel 2 X521.8(+) and X521.7(-) = channel 3 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 667 For sensor type "PTC thermistor" (p4100 = 1), the following applies: To activate the corresponding alarm or fault, p4102[0...1] must be set <= 250 °C. Note: The temperature sensor is connected at terminals X522.7(+) and X522.8(-). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 668 X535 = channel 4 (for 2x2 wire evaluation, additionally channel 10) X536 = channel 5 (for 2x2 wire evaluation, additionally channel 11) Details on the wiring are included in the parameter description for p4108. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 669 The temperature sensor is connected to the following terminals: X521.2(+) and X521.1(-) = channel 0 X521.4(+) and X521.3(-) = channel 1 X521.6(+) and X521.5(-) = channel 2 X521.8(+) and X521.7(-) = channel 3 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 670 For sensor type "PTC thermistor" (p4100[0...11] = 1), the following applies: To activate the corresponding alarm or fault, p4102[0...23] must be set <= 250 °C. Note: The hysteresis can be set in p4118[0...11]. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 671 Fault F35207 ... F35210 only causes the drive to shut down if there is at least one BICO interconnection between the drive and TM120. Note: With p4103 = 0 ms, the timer is deactivated and only the fault threshold is effective. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 672 If the fault threshold (p4102[1]) is exceeded before the delay time has expired, then fault F35207 is immediately output. For sensor type "PTC thermistor" (p4100 = 1), the following applies: - Alarm and fault threshold simultaneously respond. The fault is only issued after the delay time has expired. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 673 9627 Channel 9 fault present 9627 Channel 10 alarm present 9627 Channel 10 fault present 9627 Channel 11 alarm present 9627 Channel 11 fault present 9627 Dependency: Refer to: p4102, p4103, r4105, p4118 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 674 Displays the temperature actual value for the Terminal Module 150 (TM150) Index: [0] = Temperature channel 0 [1] = Temperature channel 1 [2] = Temperature channel 2 [3] = Temperature channel 3 [4] = Temperature channel 4 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 675 - the temperature sensor is connected at terminals 1(+) and 2(-). For p4108[0...5] = 1 (2x2 wire evaluation): - the first temperature sensor is connected at terminals 1(+) and 2(-). - the second temperature sensor is connected at terminals 3(+) and 4(-). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 676 [3] = Temperature channel 3 [4] = Temperature channel 4 [5] = Temperature channel 5 [6] = Temperature channel 6 [7] = Temperature channel 7 [8] = Temperature channel 8 [9] = Temperature channel 9 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 677 [2] = Group 2 Bit field: Signal name 1 signal 0 signal Temperature channel 0 Temperature channel 1 Temperature channel 2 Temperature channel 3 Temperature channel 4 Temperature channel 5 Temperature channel 6 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 678 The following connector inputs can use these connector outputs for interconnection: - CI: p0603 - CI: p0608[0...3] - CI: p0609[0...3] - CI: p2051 Index: [0] = Group 0 [1] = Group 1 [2] = Group 2 Dependency: Refer to: r4105, p4111, r4112, r4114 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 679 Sets the hysteresis for the fault threshold/alarm threshold (p4102[0...23]) for the Terminal Module 150 (TM150). Index: [0] = Temperature channel 0 [1] = Temperature channel 1 [2] = Temperature channel 2 [3] = Temperature channel 3 [4] = Temperature channel 4 [5] = Temperature channel 5 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 680 [3] = Temperature channel 3 [4] = Temperature channel 4 [5] = Temperature channel 5 [6] = Temperature channel 6 [7] = Temperature channel 7 [8] = Temperature channel 8 [9] = Temperature channel 9 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 681 Factory setting Description: Sets the sensor type of the first temperature sensor for the motor temperature monitoring. Value: No sensor PTC fault PTC alarm PTC alarm & timer KTY84 Bimetallic NC contact fault SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 682 Bimetallic NC contact alarm & timer PT1000 Dependency: Refer to: r0458, p0600, p0601 Note: This parameter is effective only when p0601 = 10. Terminals for PTC triplet and bimetallic: X200.3, X200.4 PTC thermistor: Tripping resistance = 1650 Ohm SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 683 This parameter is effective only when p0601 = 11. PTC thermistor: Tripping resistance = 1650 Ohm Information on using temperature sensors is provided in the following literature: - hardware description of the appropriate components - SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 684 This parameter is effective only when p0601 = 11. PTC thermistor: Tripping resistance = 1650 Ohm Information on using temperature sensors is provided in the following literature: - hardware description of the appropriate components - SINAMICS S120 Commissioning Manual SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 685 Dyn. index: - Func. diagram: - P-Group: Encoder Unit group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Displays the encoder diagnostics for the PROFIdrive interface. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 686 The encoder is working in the specified range. Index: [0] = Function reserve 1 [1] = Function reserve 2 [2] = Function reserve 3 [3] = Function reserve 4 Dependency: Refer to: p4650 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 687 The value in XIST1_ERW is reset with a 0/1 edge via binector input p4655. If value = 3: The value in XIST1_ERW is reset after a 0/1 edge via binector input p4655 when passing the next zero mark. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 688 XIST1_ERW reset High Dependency: Refer to: p4652, r4653, p4655 Note: The reset of XIST1_ERW is initiated via binector input p4655. Binector output r4654 is reset with a 0 signal from binector input p4655. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 689 - Unlimited: Only the bandwidth of the operational amplifier is effective. Index: [0] = Encoder 1 [1] = Encoder 2 [2] = Encoder 3 Dependency: Refer to: r4661 Note: A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 690 Display of the effective filter bandwidth for Sensor Module SMx10 (resolver) and SMx20 (sin/cos). The bandwidth of the filter is set using p4660. Dependency: Refer to: p4660 Note: A value of zero is displayed if an encoder is not present. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 691 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Setting for coefficient K2 to calculate the characteristic (p4662). Dependency: Refer to: p4662, p4663, p4664, p4666 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 692 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Sets the input circuit for the analog sensor. Value: Differential Single-ended A, B Single-ended A*, B* Single-ended A, B sensitive SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 693 Expert list: 1 Factory setting -10.0000 [V] 10.0000 [V] 0.0000 [V] Description: Sets the voltage when the connected sensor is at actual value zero. At this voltage channel B supplies an actual value of zero. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 694 P-Group: Encoder Unit group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting 0.00 [%] 200.00 [%] 50.00 [%] Description: Sets the ratio for the LVDT sensor. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 695 If fault F3x131 is re-parameterized to alarm (A) or no message (N), the encoder pulses which have not been corrected are added to the accumulator (p4688). The accumulator can be deactivated using p0437.7. Dependency: Refer to: p0437, p4681, p4688 Refer to: F31131 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 696 Refer to: p0425, p0437 Note: The minimum length of the zero mark must be less than the zero mark distance (p4686 < p0425). The parameter is activated using p0437.1 = 1 (zero mark edge detection). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 697 Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Displays the encoder status according to PROFIdrive for a squarewave encoder. Dependency: Refer to: A31422 Note: After alarm A3x422 is output, this parameter is set for 100 ms. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 698 Delete SMI data not permitted for component SMI data for component cannot be deleted Dependency: Refer to: p4690, p4692, p4693 Notice: Once SMI/DQI data has been deleted or downloaded successfully, the component has to be switched on (POWER ON). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 699 Save data of all SMIs and DQIs Save all data successful Insufficient memory space for backup Transfer fault during data backup Component does not contain any data Not all components from target topology saved SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 700 - the number of the next subdirectory located is displayed. - this subdirectory is not checked for valid SMI data. - if another subdirectory cannot be located, nothing is displayed in r4694[0...19]. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 701 Refer to: p4700 Note: For bit 00: 0: The trace starts with p4700 as before. 1: When powering up, the trace starts immediately with the saved parameter settings with the start of the time slices. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 702 This parameter involves the free measuring functions and is only active for p4810=6. For value = 0: The free measuring function is parameterized with master control. For value = 1: The free measuring function is parameterized without master control. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 703 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Factory setting Description: Selects the trigger signal for the trace. Index: [0] = Trace 0 parameter in BICO format [1] = Trace 1 parameter in BICO format SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 704 Factory setting -340.28235E36 340.28235E36 0.00 Description: Sets the second trigger threshold for trigger via tolerance band Index: [0] = Trace 0 [1] = Trace 1 Dependency: Only effective when p4710 = 4, 5. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 705 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Factory setting Description: Displays the trigger index in the trace buffer. The trigger event occurred at this point. Index: [0] = Trace 0 [1] = Trace 1 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 706 Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Factory setting 0.03125 [ms] 4.00000 [ms] 0.12500 [ms] Description: Sets the time slice cycle in which the trace is called. Index: [0] = Trace 0 [1] = Trace 1 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 707 Unit selection: - CU_G150_DP Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Factory setting Description: Displays the recorded data type 3 for the trace. Index: [0] = Trace 0 [1] = Trace 1 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 708 [3] = Trace 0 PINx with block Id and PIN Id [4] = Trace 1 PINy with DO Id and chart Id [5] = Trace 1 PINy with block Id and PIN Id SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 709 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Factory setting Description: Selects the sixth signal to be traced. Index: [0] = Trace 0 parameter in BICO format [1] = Trace 1 parameter in BICO format SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 710 The values 16385 to 32768 from signal 0, trace 0 are to be read out. In this case, memory bank 1 is set with p4795 = 1. The values can now be read out in r4740[0] to r4740[16383]. Dependency: Refer to: p4795 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 711 Unit selection: - CU_G150_DP Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Factory setting Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 0 and signal 5. Dependency: Refer to: r4740, p4795 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 712 Unit selection: - CU_G150_DP Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Factory setting Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 1 and signal 2. Dependency: Refer to: r4740, p4795 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 713 Unit selection: - CU_G150_DP Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Factory setting Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 1 and signal 7. Dependency: Refer to: r4740, p4795 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 714 Unit selection: - CU_G150_DP Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Factory setting Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 0 and signal 2. Dependency: Refer to: r4760 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 715 Unit selection: - CU_G150_DP Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Factory setting Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 0 and signal 7. Dependency: Refer to: r4760 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 716 Unit selection: - CU_G150_DP Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Factory setting Description: Displays the trace buffer (record buffer) for trace 1 and signal 4. Dependency: Refer to: r4760 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 717 0000 bin 1111 1111 bin Description: Sets the physical address for the first signal to be traced. The data type is defined using p4730. Index: [0] = Trace 0 [1] = Trace 1 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 718 0000 bin 1111 1111 bin Description: Sets the physical address for the fifth signal to be traced. The data type is defined using p4734. Index: [0] = Trace 0 [1] = Trace 1 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 719 FFFF FFFF hex 0000 hex Description: Sets the physical address for the trigger signal. The data type is defined by making the appropriate selection in p4711. Index: [0] = Trace 0 [1] = Trace 1 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 720 Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Factory setting Description: Changes over the memory bank to read out the contents of the trace buffer. Dependency: Refer to: r4740, r4741, r4742, r4743, r4750, r4751, r4752, r4753 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 721 Unit group: - Unit selection: - CU_G150_DP Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Factory setting Description: Displays the free memory for the trace in bytes. Dependency: Refer to: r4708 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 722 Expert list: 0 Factory setting Description: Displays the status of the function generator. 0 signal: Function generator inactive 1 signal: Function generator running Bit field: Signal name 1 signal 0 signal Bit 0 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 723 [2] = Third drive for connection Dependency: Only effective when p4810 = 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5. Note: For the function generator, only type SERVO, VECTOR or DC_CTRL type drives can be used. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 724 Sets the signal source to control the function generator. When the function generator is running, signal generation is stopped with a 0 signal from BI: p4819 and p4800 is set to 0. Dependency: Refer to: p4800 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 725 0.0025 [Hz] 16000.0000 [Hz] 4000.0000 [Hz] Description: Sets the bandwidth for the signal to be generated for the function generator. Dependency: Only effective when p4820 = 4 (PRBS). Refer to: p4830 Refer to: A02041 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 726 Unit selection: - CU_G150_DP Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Factory setting 0.00 [ms] 100000.00 [ms] 32.00 [ms] Description: Sets the ramp-up time to the offset for the function generator. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 727 Sets the scaling for the amplitude of the signal waveforms separately for each output channel. The value cannot be changed while the function generator is running. Index: [0] = First drive for connection [1] = Second drive for connection [2] = Third drive for connection SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 728 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 0 Factory setting 4294967295 Description: Sets the number of cycles of a multiple trace. The multiple trace is deactivated with a value = 0. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 729 Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Displays the total length of the identifiers of the Technology Extensions installed on this drive object. Dependency: Refer to: r4950, r4952, r4955, p4956, r4957, r4958, r4959, r4960 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 730 Technology Extension active Dependency: Refer to: r4950, r4951, r4952, r4955, r4957, r4958, r4959, r4960 Notice: If there is no Technology Extension, then it is not possible to access an index. Note: TEC: Technology Extension SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 731 Minor information of Technology Extension 2, ... Dependency: Refer to: r4950, r4951, r4952, r4955, p4956, r4957, r4958, r4960 Notice: If there is no Technology Extension, then it is not possible to access an index. Note: TEC: Technology Extension SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 732 Displays the total length of the IDs of all the invalid Technology Extensions installed on the memory card/device memory. Dependency: Refer to: r4975, r4978, r4979 Note: TEC: Technology Extension The identifier of an invalid Technology Extension comprises a maximum of 8 characters plus separator. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 733 Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Displays the number of Technology Extensions installed on the memory card/device memory. Dependency: Refer to: r4986, r4987, r4988, r4989, r4990, r4991, r4992, r4993, r4994 Note: TEC: Technology Extension SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 734 Version of Technology Extension 2, ... Dependency: Refer to: r4985, r4986, r4987, r4988, r4990, r4991, r4992, r4993, r4994 Notice: If there is no Technology Extension, then it is not possible to access an index. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 735 GUID of Technology Extension 2 r4992[34]: Major information of Technology Extension 2 r4992[35]: Minor information of Technology Extension 2, ... Dependency: Refer to: r4985, r4986, r4987, r4988, r4989, r4990, r4991, r4993, r4994 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 736 Notice: If there is no Technology Extension, then it is not possible to access an index. Note: TEC: Technology Extension The parameter is only for internal Siemens diagnostics. r4995[0...n] TEC external version / TEC ext version CU_G130_PN, Can be changed: -...
  • Page 737 (p5312, p5313, p5314, p5315). For bit 01: The moment of inertia precontrol is activated. The moment of inertia is calculated from the currently measured load torque and the saved coefficients (p5312, p5313, p5314, p5315). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 738 Moment of inertia (J) = linear coefficient (p5312) * load torque + constant coefficient (p5313) Dependency: The function module "Moment of inertia estimator" (r0108.10) must be activated for the "Moment of inertia precontrol" function. Refer to: p5310, r5311, p5312, p5314, p5315 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 739 Sets the boost factor for the copper losses at standstill for motor temperature models 1 and 3. The entered factor is active for speed n = 0 [rpm]. This factor is linearly reduced down to 1 between speeds n = 0 ... 1 [rpm]. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 740 For bit 08: When reaching the motor temperature alarm threshold, reduction of the maximum current is set as response (p0610 = 1). When the bit is set, reduction of the maximum current is active. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 741 - [°C] - [°C] - [°C] Description: Displays the ambient temperature for motor temperature model 3. This value is used to calculate the utilization display (p0034). The parameter value is an image of p0613. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 742 2 Parameters 2.2 List of parameters Dependency: Refer to: r0034 Note: Users cannot see and change parameter p0613 (only Siemens internal). r5398[0...n] Mot_temp_mod 3 alarm threshold image p5390 / A thr image p5390 VECTOR_G Can be changed: - Calculated: -...
  • Page 743 Inhibit PROFIenergy control commands Drive initiates OFF1 when transitioning to energy-saving mode Trans to energy-saving mode from PROFIdrive state S3/S4 poss Note: Pe: PROFIenergy profiles PROFIdrive state S3: ready PROFIdrive state S4: operation SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 744 Sets the phase shift of the second system with respect to the first system for the Motor Module for a 12-pulse gating unit. Value: Shift by +30 ° Shift by -30 ° Shift by 0 ° Shift by +90 ° SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 745 If the offset calculation is inhibited, then a fixed value can also be entered here. Dependency: Refer to: p6903 Note: Offset calibration is only automatically activated if the resulting motor voltage is less than 1% of the rated voltage. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 746 External trigger 1.2 Not set External trigger 1.3 Not set External trigger 1.4 Not set External trigger 2.1 Not set External trigger 2.2 Not set External trigger 2.3 Not set Hardware trigger Not set SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 747 Trigger 2.3 is formed by ANDing the signal source in p6994[2] and the bit mask in p6993[2]. Index: [0] = Trigger 2.1 [1] = Trigger 2.2 [2] = Trigger 2.3 Dependency: Refer to: p6993 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 748 [29] 7200 [30] 7300 [31] 7400 [32] 7500 [33] 7600 [34] 7700 [35] 7800 [36] 8000 [37] 8200 [38] 8300 [39] 8400 […] … Description: Setting to parameterize the signals for the recorder. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 749 Description: Display and connector output of the state of the sequencer for the recorder. Value: Not active Active Post trigger time running Prepare data save operation Start data save End data save Configuration SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 750 --> the recording time that can be realized is 2000 * 0.250 ms = 500 ms. Note: - the recording time that can be realized is displayed in r6991[1]. - if the recording time is set too long, then it is automatically reduced to what can be realized. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 751 For motors with separate winding systems (p7003 = 1) it is not possible to inhibit an individual power unit. p7001 is automatically reset if a power unit is deactivated via p0125 or p0895. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 752 Sets the alarm threshold to detect current asymmetry in the parallel circuit configuration. The deviation between the measured values and average value is evaluated. The specified value is referred to the rated power unit current (p7251[0]). Dependency: Refer to: r7251 Refer to: A05052 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 753 Displays the deviation between the measured current actual value of phase U and the average value as peak value. The maximum deviation from the average value is displayed in r7025. Dependency: Refer to: r7021, r7022, r7025 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 754 Displays the maximum absolute deviation of the measured current actual values of phase V from the average value as peak value. The deviation of the individual currents from the average value is displayed in r7021. Dependency: Refer to: r7021, r7025, r7027 Refer to: A05052 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 755 The circulating current control ensures symmetrical distribution of the total currents to the individual converters. Value: Circulating current control deactivated Circulating current control activated Dependency: Circulating current control is not possible for separate, offset motor winding systems (p7003 = 2). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 756 For the particular Motor Module, the correction time must be added to the valve lockout time to be compensated for phase U (p1828). The corrective value is used to compensate variations/spread in the valve lockout times of Motor Modules for a parallel circuit configuration. Dependency: Refer to: p1828 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 757 Unit group: 6_5 Unit selection: p0505 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2002 Expert list: 1 Factory setting - [A] - [A] - [A] Description: Displays the circulating current of phase W as peak value. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 758 Displays the relative system runtime when the fault or alarm occurred. Dependency: Refer to: r7100, r7101, r7103 Note: The last fault case that occurred is documented in index 0. The parameter is reset to 0 at POWER ON. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 759 - [°C] - [°C] - [°C] Description: Displays the maximum depletion layer temperature in the power unit for a parallel circuit configuration. The maximum value of all power units is displayed in r0037[1]. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 760 Factory setting - [°C] - [°C] - [°C] Description: Displays the inverter temperature 2 in the power unit for a parallel circuit configuration. The maximum value of all power units is displayed in r0037[6]. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 761 Factory setting - [°C] - [°C] - [°C] Description: Displays rectifier temperature 1 in the power unit for a parallel circuit configuration. The maximum value of all power units is displayed in r0037[11]. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 762 Factory setting - [°C] - [°C] - [°C] Description: Displays depletion layer temperature 4 in the power unit for a parallel circuit configuration. The maximum value of all power units is displayed in r0037[16]. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 763 Expert list: 1 Factory setting - [A] - [A] - [A] Description: Displays the measured actual value of phase U as peak value. The summed value of all power units is displayed in r0069[0]. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 764 Expert list: 1 Factory setting - [A] - [A] - [A] Description: Displays the measured offset of phase W as peak value. The summed value of all power units is displayed in r0069[5]. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 765 Not for motor type: - Scaling: p2001 Expert list: 1 Factory setting - [V] - [V] - [V] Description: Displays the actual voltage, phase W. The average value of all power units is displayed in r0089[2]. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 766 The sum of the rated currents of all power units connected in parallel is displayed in r0207. Index: [0] = Rated value [1] = Load duty cycle with low overload [2] = Load duty cycle with high overload SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 767 The counter state corresponds to the valve wear. A maximum of 650% of the specified service life is displayed. Dependency: Refer to: p7786 Notice: After a valve has been replaced, the corresponding power cycling counter must be reset. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 768 2. Switch on the system and acknowledge that valve 4 has been replaced (p7786.4 = 1). --> the power cycling counter of valve 4 is reset (r7743 = 0). 3. Carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on). --> as a consequence p7786.4 is automatically set to 0. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 769 For the commissioning software, the ASCII characters are displayed uncoded. Dependency: Refer to: p7765, p7766, p7767, p7768 Notice: An ASCII table (excerpt) can be found, for example, in the appendix to the List Manual. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 770 When know-how protection has been activated, the contents of the memory card (parameter and DCC data) can be additionally protected against being used with other memory cards/Control Units. This bit is only set if know-how protection is active and in p7765.0 is set = 1. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 771 For bit 06: When know-how protection is activated, the drive data can be traced using the device trace function. This bit is only set if know-how protection is active and p7765.2 is set = 1. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 772 Sets the number of parameters for the OEM exception list (p7764[0...n]). p7764[0...n], with n = p7763 - 1 Dependency: Refer to: p7764 Note: KHP: Know-How Protection Even if know-how protection is set, parameters in this list can be read and written to. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 773 Extended copy protection - linked to the memory card and CU Basic copy protection - linked to the memory card Permit trace and measuring functions for diagnostic purposes Dependency: Refer to: p7766, p7767, p7768 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 774 Expert list: 0 Factory setting Description: Sets the new password for know-how protection. Dependency: Refer to: p7766, p7768 Note: KHP: Know-How Protection When reading, p7767[0...29] = 42 dec (ASCII character = "*") is displayed. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 775 This action loads the parameters to the NVRAM. If value = 3: This action sets parameters p7771 ... p7774 to the factory setting. It is recommended to avoid placing unnecessary load on the subsequent upload/download operation. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 776 Valve 5 replaced Valve 6 replaced Generate report Notice: This write process can take several minutes. Note: The power unit involved can be assigned the correct P index using p0124 (power unit detection via LED). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 777 If "No signal" is set for a trace channel, then the recording duration of the other time characteristics is increased. For index 8 ... 15: The signals are set in p7790[8...15], whose instantaneous value is to be recorded. Value: No signal Pulse frequency Phase current U Phase current V SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 778 Experts can then evaluate this data. For p7792 = 1, the trace data of the component is written to files on the memory card in a non-volatile fashion. The parameter is then automatically set to zero. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 779 Unit group: - Unit selection: - CU_G150_DP Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Displays the parameter value read from the DRIVE-CLiQ component. Dependency: Refer to: p7820, p7821, p7822 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 780 Flashing red/green with 0.5 Hz --> firmware is being updated. Flashing red/green with 2 Hz --> POWER ON of the components is required. Only components from firmware version 2.5 support the red/green flashing at 2 Hz. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 781 145: Checking the loaded firmware (checksum) was not completed by the component in the appropriate time. 156: Component with the specified component number is not available. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 782 2 Parameters 2.2 List of parameters Additional values: Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting. Dependency: Refer to: p7828 Note: p7829 is automatically set to 0 after the firmware has been successfully downloaded. The new firmware only becomes active at the next system run-up.
  • Page 783 10702: ENC_ID_SUBTRACE_TRACK_B_TRIG 10723: ENC_ID_ACT_STATEMACHINE_FUNCTION 10724: ENC_ID_ACT_FUNMAN_FUNCTION 10725: ENC_ID_SAFETY_COUNTER_CRC 10728: ENC_ID_SUBTRACE_AREA 10740: ENC_ID_POS_ABSOLUTE 10741: ENC_ID_POS_REFMARK 10742: ENC_ID_SAWTOOTH 10743: ENC_ID_SAFETY_PULSE_COUNTER 10745: ENC_ID_EIU_ZEROCTRL 10756: ENC_ID_DSA_ACTUAL_SPEED 10757: ENC_ID_SPEED_DEV_ABS 10772: ENC_ID_DSA_POS_XIST1 10788: ENC_ID_AB_CROSS_CORR 10789: ENC_ID_AB_GAIN_Y_CORR 10790: ENC_ID_AB_PEAK_CORR 11825: ENC_ID_RES_TRANSITION_RATIO SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 784 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Parameter to display a DSA signal in the signed-integer format. The associated signal number is represented at the appropriate index in r7831. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 785 Amps peak-to-peak Degrees Celsius Degrees Millimeter or degrees Meters / minute Meters / second Millihenry Newton meter Newton meter/Ampere Volt/Ampere Newton meter second / rad 31.25 microseconds Microseconds Milliseconds Kilowatt Micro amps peak-to-peak SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 786 1/second^3 120: 0.01 percent/millisecond 121: Pulses / revolution 122: Microfarads 123: Milliohm 124: 0.01 Newton meter 125: Kilogram millimeter^2 126: Rad / (seconds newton meter) 127: Henry 128: Kelvin 129: Hours 130: Kilohertz SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 787 Displays the version of the firmware stored on the memory medium of the drive device. Depending on the drive device being used, the memory medium is a memory card, or an internal non-volatile device memory. Index: [0] = Internal [1] = External [2] = Parameter backup SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 788 High byte: Component number Low byte: 0/1 (not available/available) Dependency: Refer to: p7852 Note: The values are valid if all available Control Units adopt the "Initialization finished" state (r3988 = 800) following power SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 789 Displays status and configuration changes of all of the drive objects in the complete unit. When changing the status or the configuration of the Control Unit or a drive object, the value of this parameter is incremented. Dependency: Refer to: r7868, r7869, r7870 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 790 The drive object with object number in p0101[n-1] has changed its status. Example: r7868[3] was incremented since the last time it was read. --> the status of the drive object with object number in p0101[2] was changed. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 791 DRIVE-CLiQ target topology. When changing either p9902 or p9903, the value in this index is incremented. For index 6: DRIVE-CLiQ sockets. When changing p0109, the value in this index is incremented. For index 7: Technology Extensions When changing Technology Extensions, the value in this index is incremented. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 792 Drive object parameter count. When changing the number of parameters by loading Drive Control Chart (DCC), the value in this index is incremented. For index 10: Drive object configuration. When changing p0107, p0108, p0171, p0172 or p0173, the value in this index is incremented. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 793 Drive object configuration. When changing p0107, p0108, p0171, p0172 or p0173, the value in this index is incremented. For index 11: Drive object bearing. When changing p0530 or p0531, the value in this index is incremented. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 794 Drive object changeover of units. When changing reference or changeover parameters (e.g. p2000, p0304), the value in this index is incremented. For index 9: Drive object parameter count. When changing the number of parameters by loading Drive Control Chart (DCC), the value in this index is incremented. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 795 Drive object configuration. When changing either p0107 or p0108, the value in this index is incremented. For index 12: Drive object configuration. When activating/deactivating write protection or know-how protection, the value in this index is incremented. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 796 Drive object parameter count. When changing the number of parameters by loading Drive Control Chart (DCC), the value in this index is incremented. For index 10: Drive object configuration. When changing p0107, p0108, p0171, p0172 or p0173, the value in this index is incremented. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 797 Drive object parameter count. When changing the number of parameters by loading Drive Control Chart (DCC), the value in this index is incremented. For index 15: Encoder configuration. When changing p0400, the value in this index is incremented. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 798 [14] = Drive object number object 14 [15] = Drive object number object 15 [16] = Drive object number object 16 [17] = Drive object number object 17 [18] = Drive object number object 18 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 799 [2] = To BO: r8510.2 [3] = To BO: r8510.3 [4] = To BO: r8510.4 [5] = To BO: r8510.5 [6] = To BO: r8510.6 [7] = To BO: r8510.7 Dependency: Refer to: r8510 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 800 Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Sets the signal source for wordwise input signals. This signal value is available in connector output r8513 for further interconnection. Dependency: Refer to: r8513 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 801 Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Display and binector output for the signal interconnected via binector input p8501[0...21]. Bit field: Signal name 1 signal 0 signal From BI: p8501[0] From BI: p8501[1] From BI: p8501[2] SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 802 Not for motor type: - Scaling: PERCENT Expert list: 1 Factory setting - [%] - [%] - [%] Description: Display and connector output for the signal interconnected via connector input p8504. Dependency: Refer to: p8504 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 803 Displays the macro file saved in the appropriate directory on the memory card/device memory. Dependency: Refer to: p0015 Note: For a value = 9999999, the following applies: The read operation is still running. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 804 Expert list: 0 VECTOR_G, B_INF, TM31, TM120, TM150, Factory setting TB30 Description: Displays the macro currently being executed on the drive object. Dependency: Refer to: p0015, p0700, p1000, p1500, r8570, r8571, r8572, r8573 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 805 Factory setting 0000 hex FFFF FFFF hex 0080 hex Description: Sets the SYNC object parameter for the following CANopen objects: - 1005 hex: COB-ID Note: SINAMICS operates as SYNC load. COB-ID: CAN object identification SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 806 The smallest cycle is 100 ms. For p8606 = 0, heartbeat telegrams are not sent. Dependency: Refer to: p8604 Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1017 hex. Activating the heartbeat protocol automatically deactivates the node guarding. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 807 Value: Inactive Start CAN controller Index: [0] = Manual controller start function [1] = Activating the automatic controller start function Note: For index 0: This parameter is automatically reset to 0 after start. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 808 All drive objects are acknowledged by writing the value 0 to index 0. As soon as a fault has been acknowledged or an alarm cleared, then it is also cleared from the fault list. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 809 [60] = Fault 4/ drive 7 [61] = Fault 5/ drive 7 [62] = Fault 6/ drive 7 [63] = Fault 7/ drive 7 [64] = Fault 8/ drive 7 [65] = Number of faults drive 8 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 810 1) Using the address switch on the Control Unit. --> p8620 can then only be read and displays the selected Node ID. --> A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON. --> CANopen Node ID and PROFIBUS address are identical. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 811 Bit rate = 20 kbit/s --> p8622 = 6 --> associated bit timing is in p8623[6]. Value: 1 Mbit/s 800 kbit/s 500 kbit/s 250 kbit/s 125 kbit/s 50 kbit/s 20 kbit/s 10 kbit/s Dependency: Refer to: p8623 Note: The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 812 This means that it is possible to access all SINAMICS parameters via CAN. Index 0 (drive object number): 0: Not possible to access virtual CANopen objects 1: Device 2 ... 65535: Drive object number of drive 1 ... 8 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 813 [12] = Interface 1 arbitration 2 register [13] = Interface 1 message control register [14] = Interface 1 data A1 register [15] = Interface 1 data A2 register [16] = Interface 1 data B1 register SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 814 Factory setting Description: Sets and displays the CANopen NMT state. Value: Initialization Stopped Operational 127: Pre-operational 128: Reset node 129: Reset Communication Note: The value 0 (initialization) is only displayed and cannot be set. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 815 Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1401 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7). Transmission types 0, 1, FE and FF can be set. PDO: Process Data Object SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 816 Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1404 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7). Transmission types 0, 1, FE and FF can be set. PDO: Process Data Object SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 817 Note: Corresponds to the CANopen object 1407 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7). Transmission types 0, 1, FE and FF can be set. PDO: Process Data Object SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 818 Corresponds to the CANopen object 1602 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7). Dummy mapping not supported. The parameter can only be written online when the associated COB ID in p870x is set as invalid. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 819 Corresponds to the CANopen object 1605 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7). Dummy mapping not supported. The parameter can only be written online when the associated COB ID in p870x is set as invalid. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 820 A valid COB-ID can only be set for the available (existing) channel. Notice: For inhibit time and event timer, the following apply: A value that is not a multiple integer of the CANopen sampling time is rounded-off. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 821 Corresponds to the CANopen object 1802 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7). Transmission types 0, 1 ... F0, FE and FF can be set. p8848: CANopen sampling time PDO: Process Data Object SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 822 Corresponds to the CANopen object 1804 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7). Transmission types 0, 1 ... F0, FE and FF can be set. p8848: CANopen sampling time PDO: Process Data Object SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 823 Corresponds to the CANopen object 1806 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7). Transmission types 0, 1 ... F0, FE and FF can be set. p8848: CANopen sampling time PDO: Process Data Object SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 824 Corresponds to the CANopen object 1A01 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7). The parameter can only be written online when the associated COB ID in p872x is set as invalid. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 825 Corresponds to the CANopen object 1A04 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7). The parameter can only be written online when the associated COB ID in p872x is set as invalid. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 826 Corresponds to the CANopen object 1A07 hex + 40 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7). The parameter can only be written online when the associated COB ID in p872x is set as invalid. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 827 [4] = Drive object number for device module 4 [5] = Drive object number for device module 5 [6] = Drive object number for device module 6 [7] = Drive object number for device module 7 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 828 Index 14 corresponds to the CANopen object 580E hex + 80 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7). Index 15 corresponds to the CANopen object 580F hex + 80 hex * x (x: Drive number 0 ... 7). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 829 An index can only be used, if the corresponding object has not been mapped in a PDO. Index: [0] = PZD object 0 [1] = PZD object 1 [2] = PZD object 2 [3] = PZD object 3 [4] = PZD object 4 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 830 Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 [6] = PZD 7 [7] = PZD 8 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 831 [9] = PZD 10 + 11 [10] = PZD 11 + 12 [11] = PZD 12 + 13 [12] = PZD 13 + 14 [13] = PZD 14 + 15 [14] = PZD 15 + 16 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 832 1 signal 0 signal Ready for switching on Ready Operation enabled Fault present No coasting active No Quick Stop active Switching-on inhibited active Alarm present Can be freely interconnected (BI: p8785) Control request SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 833 Unit group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Sets the signal source for bit 15 of the CANopen status word. Dependency: Refer to: r8784 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 834 Corresponds to the CANopen object 605D hex + 800 hex * x (x: drive number 0 ... 7). The BICO interconnection is established, if the CANopen control word is mapped at one of the locations x = 0 ... 3 in the receive process data buffer. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 835 Display and connector output to interconnect standardized I32 setpoint CANopen objects of the profile velocity mode for SDO transfer. An index can only be used, if the corresponding object has not been mapped in a PDO. Index: [0] = Target velocity SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 836 Only characters belonging to the standard ASCII character set may be used (32 dec to 126 dec). Note: An ASCII table (excerpt) can be found, for example, in the appendix to the List Manual. For p8806[0...31]: System identifier. For p8806[32...53]: Location identifier. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 837 Parameter p8809 contains the information described below. For p8809[0...3]: Contains the value from r9781[0] "SI change tracking checksum functional". For p8809[4...7]: Contains the value from r9782[0] "SI change tracking time stamp checksum functional". SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 838 When newly selecting the project p8811, p8812[1] is set to the factory setting. For p8811 = 8, 12, 16 the following applies: Min/max/factory setting: 500/500/500 µs For p8811 = 64, the following applies: Min/max/factory setting: 1000/2000/2000 µs SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 839 Expert list: 1 CU_G130_DP (PN CBE20), Factory setting CU_G150_DP (PN CBE20) Description: Selects the firmware version for the CBE20. Value: PROFINET Device PROFINET gate SINAMICS Link EtherNet/IP Modbus TCP Customer-specific from the OEM directory SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 840 Assignment of the hardware for cyclic communications via PZD interface 1 (IF1) and interface 2 (IF2). Value: Inactive Control Unit onboard COMM BOARD Automatic Index: [0] = Interface 1 [1] = Interface 2 Dependency: Refer to: p2030, p8815 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 841 With p8842 = 1, the values in p8841 are transferred to the COMM BOARD and activated. After this, p8842 is automatically set to zero. Dependency: Refer to: p8841 Note: For CBE20, certain SINAMICS parameters are newly evaluated and activated. An existing, cyclic bus connection is interrupted. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 842 BOARD, PN CBE20), Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 CU_G130_DP (COMM BOARD, PN CBE20), Factory setting CU_G150_DP (COMM BOARD, PN CBE20) Description: Displays the receive configuration data for the COMM BOARD. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 843 [10] = PZD 11 [11] = PZD 12 [12] = PZD 13 [13] = PZD 14 [14] = PZD 15 [15] = PZD 16 [16] = PZD 17 [17] = PZD 18 [18] = PZD 19 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 844 [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 Note: IF2: Interface 2 PZD1 to PZD2 are displayed bit-serially in r8890 to r8891. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 845 [17] = PZD 18 [18] = PZD 19 [19] = PZD 20 [20] = PZD 21 [21] = PZD 22 [22] = PZD 23 [23] = PZD 24 [24] = PZD 25 Note: IF2: Interface 2 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 846 Selects the PZD (actual values) to be sent via interface 2 in the word format. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 [6] = PZD 7 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 847 Displays the sent PZD (actual values) sent via interface 2. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 848 [7] = PZD 8 [8] = PZD 9 [9] = PZD 10 [10] = PZD 11 [11] = PZD 12 [12] = PZD 13 [13] = PZD 14 [14] = PZD 15 [15] = PZD 16 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 849 [7] = PZD 8 [8] = PZD 9 [9] = PZD 10 Bit field: Signal name 1 signal 0 signal Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 850 Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 [6] = PZD 7 [7] = PZD 8 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 851 = x --> state of cyclic communication r8858[3] = y --> state of the IP configuration r8858[4] = 1281 --> device ID 0501 hex = SINAMICS S120/S150 r8858[5 ... 39] --> only for internal Siemens diagnostics. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 852 Displays the COMM BOARD identification data Index: [0] = Version interface structure [1] = Version interface driver [2] = Company (Siemens = 42) [3] = CB type [4] = Firmware version [5] = Firmware date (year) [6] = Firmware date (day/month)
  • Page 853 [11] = PZD 12 + 13 [12] = PZD 13 + 14 [13] = PZD 14 + 15 [14] = PZD 15 + 16 [15] = PZD 16 + 17 [16] = PZD 17 + 18 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 854 [3] = PZD 4 + 5 [4] = PZD 5 + 6 [5] = PZD 6 + 7 [6] = PZD 7 + 8 [7] = PZD 8 + 9 [8] = PZD 9 + 10 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 855 Bit 24 Bit 25 Bit 26 Bit 27 Bit 28 Bit 29 Bit 30 Bit 31 Notice: A maximum of 4 indices of the "trace" function can be used. Note: IF2: Interface 2 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 856 Bit 24 Bit 25 Bit 26 Bit 27 Bit 28 Bit 29 Bit 30 Bit 31 Notice: A maximum of 4 indices of the "trace" function can be used. Note: IF2: Interface 2 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 857 1 ... 32: telegram word A pair of values p8870[index], p8872[index] may only be used once in single a device. A change only becomes effective after POWER ON, reset, project download or p8842 = 1. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 858 1 ... 32: telegram word A pair of values p8870[index], p8872[index] may only be used once in single a device. A change only becomes effective after POWER ON, reset, project download or p8842 = 1. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 859 For p8839[0] = 2 (COMM BOARD via interface 1), the following applies: - p8871[index] assigns PZD p2051[index]. For p8839[1] = 2 (COMM BOARD via interface 2), the following applies: - p8871[index] assigns PZD p8851[index]. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 860 Selects the address of the SINAMICS Link sender from which the process data (PZD) is received. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 [6] = PZD 7 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 861 [31] = PZD 32 Dependency: Refer to: p8870 Note: Value range: 0: Not used 1 ... 64: address A change only becomes effective after POWER ON, reset, project download or p8842 = 1. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 862 [14] = PZD 15 [15] = PZD 16 [16] = PZD 17 [17] = PZD 18 [18] = PZD 19 [19] = PZD 20 [20] = PZD 21 [21] = PZD 22 [22] = PZD 23 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 863 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Displays the bus address of sender from which the PZD is received. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 864 [7] = PZD 8 [8] = PZD 9 [9] = PZD 10 [10] = PZD 11 [11] = PZD 12 [12] = PZD 13 [13] = PZD 14 [14] = PZD 15 [15] = PZD 16 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 865 Description: Displays the byte offset of the PZD in the receive telegram. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 866 [16] = PZD 17 [17] = PZD 18 [18] = PZD 19 [19] = PZD 20 [20] = PZD 21 [21] = PZD 22 [22] = PZD 23 [23] = PZD 24 [24] = PZD 25 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 867 Displays the byte offset of the PZD in the send telegram. Index: [0] = PZD 1 [1] = PZD 2 [2] = PZD 3 [3] = PZD 4 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 868 Selects bits to be sent via interface 2. The individual bits are combined to form status word 1. Index: [0] = Bit 0 [1] = Bit 1 [2] = Bit 2 [3] = Bit 3 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 869 [1] = Bit 1 [2] = Bit 2 [3] = Bit 3 [4] = Bit 4 [5] = Bit 5 [6] = Bit 6 [7] = Bit 7 [8] = Bit 8 [9] = Bit 9 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 870 [7] = Bit 7 [8] = Bit 8 [9] = Bit 9 [10] = Bit 10 [11] = Bit 11 [12] = Bit 12 [13] = Bit 13 [14] = Bit 14 [15] = Bit 15 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 871 [4] = Free status word 5 Bit field: Signal name 1 signal 0 signal Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 872 Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of PZD2 received via interface 2. Bit field: Signal name 1 signal 0 signal Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 873 Binector output for bit-serial interconnection of PZD4 (normally control word 2) received via interface 2. Bit field: Signal name 1 signal 0 signal Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 874 The PZD is selected via p8899[1]. Bit field: Signal name 1 signal 0 signal Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9 Bit 10 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 875 From the signal source set via the connector input, the corresponding lower 16 bits are converted. p8899[0...1] together with r8894.0...15 and r8895.0...15 forms two connector-binector converters: Connector input p8899[0] to binector output in r8894.0...15 Connector input p8899[1] to binector output in r8895.0...15 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 876 Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Sets the subnet mask for the Industrial Ethernet interface (X127) on the Control Unit. The actual subnet mask is displayed in r8913. Dependency: Refer to: p8905, r8913 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 877 Unit selection: - CU_G150_DP Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Activation of the FTP server. Permits the FTP access to the /INSTALL/SINAMICS directory of the memory card. Value: SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 878 Every SINAMICS device type has its own PROFINET Device ID and its own PROFINET GSD. Note: List of the SINAMICS Device IDs: 0501 hex: S120/S150 0504 hex: G130/G150 050A hex: DC MASTER 050C hex: MV 050F hex: G120P 0510 hex: G120C...
  • Page 879 An ASCII table (excerpt) can be found, for example, in the appendix to the List Manual. The interface configuration (p8920 and following) is activated with p8925. The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting. PN: PROFINET SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 880 Sets the DHCP mode for the onboard PROFINET interface on the Control Unit. The actual DHCP mode is displayed in r8934. Value: DHCP off DHCP on, identification using MAC address DHCP on, identification via name of station SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 881 Automation and Safety Notice: The F CPU may only use PROFIsafe telegrams. Note: A change only becomes effective after POWER ON, reset or download. For PROFINET system redundancy, p8929 should be set = 1. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 882 When the DHCP mode is active (parameter value not equal to 0), PROFINET communication via this interface is no longer possible! However, the interface can be used for commissioning tool such as STARTER or SCOUT. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 883 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Display to diagnose the cyclic PROFINET connections. Index: [0] = Number of cyclic connections [1] = Number of send subslots of all connections SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 884 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 CU_G130_DP (PN CBE20), Factory setting CU_G150_DP (PN CBE20) Description: Sets the IP address for the Communication Board Ethernet 20/25 (CBE20/CBE25). Dependency: Refer to: p8945, r8951 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 885 However, the interface can be used by the STARTER/SCOUT commissioning tool. Note: The interface configuration (p8940 and following) is activated with p8945. The parameter is not influenced by setting the factory setting. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 886 Unit selection: - CBE20), Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 CU_G130_DP (PN CBE20), Factory setting CU_G150_DP (PN CBE20) Description: Displays the actual IP address for the Communication Board Ethernet 20/25 (CBE20/CBE25). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 887 FFFF FFFF hex CBE20) Description: Displays the DAP ID for PROFINET via the Communication Board Ethernet 20/25 (CBE20/CBE25). The combination of device ID (r8909) and DAP ID (r8959) uniquely identifies a PROFINET access point. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 888 Setting for the behavior of a PROFIsafe communication connection depending on another isochronous communication connection. Value: Recommendation: A value of 1 is recommended, if problems are encountered with the PROFIsafe connection when synchronizing. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 889 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 CU_G130_DP (PN CBE20), Factory setting CU_G150_DP (PN CBE20) Description: Displays the IP address of the second PROFINET controller connected with the device via CBE20/CBE25. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 890 11: Manufacturer (upper byte) and version (lower byte) (r9207) 12: Serial number (r9208) 13: Index (r9207) 15: Comparison level (r9207) 23: Article number (r9207) 24: Hardware serial number (r9208) 25: Envelope article number (r9207) 28: Firmware version (r9207) SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 891 Unit selection: - CU_G150_DP Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Sets the component number for a component to get its status LED to flash. Dependency: Refer to: p9211 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 892 Displays the statistics for the acyclic DRIVE-CLiQ communication of a component. The component is preset in p9221. The entry comprises the following elements: Index 0: Parameter Id. Index 1: Number of messages sent. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 893 Enable Inhibit Enable referencing via SCC Enable Inhibit Dependency: Refer to: p9501 Refer to: F01682, F01683 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 894 If the absolute position is not enabled, then the parameterized modulo value is not taken into account. This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: SLP: Safely Limited Position SP: Safe Position SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 895 For bit = 0, the actual velocity is calculated for space vector modulation. For bit = 1, the actual velocity is calculated for edge modulation. This value depends on the setting in p1802. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 896 - the actual value sensing clock cycle must be set to the same value as the current controller clock cycle (p0115). For SINAMICS S120M, the following applies: Only setting p9311 = 0 or 2 ms is possible (a value of 0 is internally assumed to be 2). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 897 Sets the resolution of the absolute position for a linear absolute encoder. The encoder that is used for the safe motion monitoring functions on the Motor Module/Hydraulic Module must be parameterized in this parameter. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 898 Sets the grid division for a linear encoder. The encoder that is used for the safe motion monitoring functions on the Motor Module/Hydraulic Module must be parameterized in this parameter. Dependency: Refer to: p0407, p9316 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 899 The encoder that is used for the safe motion monitoring functions on the Motor Module/Hydraulic Module must be parameterized in this parameter. Dependency: Refer to: p9520 Notice: The fourth decimal point can be rounded-off depending on the size of the entered number (from 3 places before the decimal point). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 900 In the case of encoderless monitoring functions, the pole pair number must be multiplied by the numerator of the gearbox ratio. Example: Gearbox ratio 1:4, pole pair number (r0313) = 2 --> p9321 = 1, p9322 = 8 (4 x 2) SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 901 This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON. For p9326 = 1, the following applies: Motor Module uses an encoder for closed-loop speed control, it involves a 1-encoder system. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 902 Sets the tolerance for the function "Safe Operating Stop" (SOS). Dependency: Refer to: p9530 Refer to: C01707 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: SOS: Safe Operating Stop SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 903 The following applies to the setting of these limits: - p9334[x] > p9335[x] - p9334[x] must lie in the valid traversing range (-737280 ... 737280). SLP: Safely Limited Position / SE: Safe software limit switches SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 904 The following applies to the setting of these limits: - p9334[x] > p9335[x] - p9335[x] must lie in the valid traversing range (-737280 ... 737280). SLP: Safely Limited Position / SE: Safe software limit switches SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 905 For a linear axis, the tolerance is internally limited to 10 mm. For a "linear axis with rotating motor" and factory setting of p9320, p9321 and p9322, the factory setting of p9342 corresponds to a position tolerance of 36 ° on the motor side. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 906 This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON. For linear axes, the maximum value is limited to 1 mm. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 907 This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: SAM: Safe Acceleration Monitor (safe acceleration monitoring) SBR: Safe Brake Ramp (safe brake ramp monitoring) SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring) SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 908 The velocity hysteresis is effective only if the function is enabled (p9301.16 = p9501.16 = 1). The parameter is included in the crosswise data comparison of the two monitoring channels. SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring) SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 909 This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: If the "actual value synchronization" is not enabled (p9301.3 = 0), then the value parameterized in p9342 is used as tolerance in the crosswise data comparison. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 910 This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: The set time is rounded internally to an integer multiple of the monitoring clock cycle. SOS: Safe Operating Stop SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 911 Sets the time after which STO must be active when initiating the test stop. Dependency: Refer to: p9557 Refer to: C01798 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 912 Notice: This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: The shutdown speed has no effect for a value = 0. SS1: Safe Stop 1 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 913 Note: In the extended sense, a bus failure should be seen here as a communication error in the control signals of the safety functions (e.g. via PROFIsafe or TM54F). SLS: Safely Limited Speed SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 914 This parameter is overwritten by the copy function of the safety functions integrated in the drive. Note: The set time is rounded internally to an integer multiple of the monitoring clock cycle. SDI: Safe Direction (safe motion direction) SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 915 Sets the velocity limit for the "SAM" and "SBR" functions. SAM is deactivated once the set velocity limit has been undershot. SBR is deactivated if the safe brake ramp falls below the set velocity limit. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 916 16 bit. The scaling is realized by dividing r9713[0] with this scaling factor. If, during operation, a position actual value is determined, which cannot be scaled to the 16 bits, then message C30711 with value 7001 is output and safety stop response STOP F. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 917 1500.0000 [rpm] Description: Sets the reference value to define the brake ramp. The rate of rise of the brake ramp depends upon p9381 (reference value) and p9383 (monitoring time). Dependency: Refer to: p9382, p9383 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 918 - for synchronous motors, the calculation is automatically made with the value 4. - for induction motors, the calculation is automatically made with a value of 0 (if the code number of the power unit p0201[0] < 14000, otherwise with a value of 2). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 919 If this percentage value is reduced excessively, then this can result in a safety message and an inaccurate actual value. Note: This parameter is only effective for encoderless actual value sensing (p9506/p9306 = 1, 3). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 920 Motor Module/Hydraulic Module. Index: [0] = Checksum over SI parameters for motion monitoring [1] = Checksum over SI parameters with hardware reference Dependency: Refer to: p9399 Note: SI: Safety Integrated SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 921 --> All of the parameter values were able to be transferred error-free. r9406[n] > 0 --> Displays r9407[n] the first index of the parameter number r9406[n] that was not transferred. Dependency: Refer to: r9406, r9408 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 922 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Only for internal Siemens service purposes. Dependency: Refer to: r9406, r9407 Note: All indices from r9406 to r9408 designate the same parameter. r9406[x] parameter number, parameter not accepted...
  • Page 923 The list is sorted according to signal sources and is structured as follows: r9842[0]: Interconnection 1 (signal sink, BICO coded), r9843[0]: Interconnection 1 (signal source, BICO coded) r9842[1]: Interconnection 2 (signal sink, BICO coded), r9843[1]: Interconnection 2 (signal source, BICO coded) SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 924 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Displays the number of signal sources from this drive to other drives/drive objects (Binector Output/Connector Output, BO/CO). Dependency: Refer to: r9491, r9492, p9493 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 925 Refer to: r9490, r9491, r9492 Note: All indices of r9491 to p9493 designate the same interconnection. r9491[x] contains the signal receiver and r9492[x] the matching signal source; p9493[x] can be set to modify the interconnection. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 926 Displays the number of saved BICO interconnections to drive objects that are either not capable of operation or have been deactivated. BO/CO parameters are on the drive object that is either not capable of operation or has been deactivated (signal source). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 927 Refer to: F01652 Note: A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON. The monitoring clock cycle must be a multiple of the actual value sensing clock cycle (see the parameter description for p9511). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 928 For the commissioning software, after changing over the axis type, the units dependent on the axis type are only updated after a project upload. A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 929 The value should be set, so that it is precisely at 2^n revolutions, so that when the range that can be represented (+/- 2048) overflows, this does not cause the position actual value to jump. The modulo function is deactivated for a value = 0. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 930 SS1 with a drive-based braking response. As a consequence, brake monitoring (SBR, SAM) is deactivated. SS1E: Safe Stop 1 external (Safe Stop 1 with external stop) SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 931 If a PROFIdrive controller exchanges process data in clock cycle synchronism with the Control Unit, then p9510 must be set to 1. This also applies if the drive itself does not exchange process data in clock cycle synchronism. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 932 0 signal SLS static (CU) Static selected Static deselected SDI positive static (CU) Static selected Static deselected SDI negative static (CU) Static selected Static deselected Dependency: Refer to: p9601, p9801 Refer to: F01682 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 933 The encoder that is used for the safe motion monitoring functions on the Control Unit must be parameterized in this parameter. Bit field: Signal name 1 signal 0 signal Incrementer Encoder CRC least significant byte first Redundant coarse position val. most significant bit left-aligned SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 934 For safety functions that have not been enabled (p9501 = 0), the following applies: When booting p9517 is automatically set the same as p0407. For safety functions that are enabled (p9501 > 0), the following applies: p9517 is checked whether it coincides with p0407. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 935 Sets the gear ratio between the encoder and load in mm/revolution for a linear axis with rotary encoder. Notice: The fourth decimal point can be rounded-off depending on the size of the entered number (from 3 places before the decimal point). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 936 Sets the number of valid bits of the redundant coarse position value. The encoder that is used for the safe motion monitoring functions on the Control Unit must be parameterized in this parameter. Dependency: Refer to: r0470, p9323 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 937 For p9526 = 1, the encoder for the closed-loop speed control is used for the second channel of the motion monitoring functions (1-encoder system). A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 938 Sets the limit values for the function "Safely Limited Speed" (SLS). Index: [0] = Limit value SLS1 [1] = Limit value SLS2 [2] = Limit value SLS3 [3] = Limit value SLS4 Dependency: Refer to: p9532, p9561, p9563 Refer to: C01714 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 939 This is an evaluation factor to define the setpoint limit from the selected actual speed limit. The active SLS limit value is evaluated with this factor and is made available as setpoint limit in r9733. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 940 The following applies to the setting of these limits: - p9534[x] > p9535[x] - p9534[x] must lie in the valid traversing range (-737280 ... 737280). SLP: Safely Limited Position / SE: Safe software limit switches SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 941 [7] = Cam position SCA8 (SN8) [8] = Cam position SCA9 (SN9) [9] = Cam position SCA10 (SN10) [10] = Cam position SCA11 (SN11) [11] = Cam position SCA12 (SN12) [12] = Cam position SCA13 (SN13) SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 942 [28] = Cam position SCA29 (SN29) [29] = Cam position SCA30 (SN30) Dependency: Refer to: p9501, p9503, p9537 Note: A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON. SCA: Safe Cam / SN: Safe software cam SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 943 [3] = Cam position SCA4 (SN4) [4] = Cam position SCA5 (SN5) [5] = Cam position SCA6 (SN6) [6] = Cam position SCA7 (SN7) [7] = Cam position SCA8 (SN8) [8] = Cam position SCA9 (SN9) SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 944 [28] = Cam position SCA29 (SN29) [29] = Cam position SCA30 (SN30) Dependency: Refer to: p9501, p9503, p9536 Note: A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON. SCA: Safe Cam / SN: Safe software cam SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 945 Cam 6 (index 5) is assigned cam track 1. If the position lies within the range of this cam, a value of 0 is entered in the SGA "cam range" of the first cam track. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 946 [0] = Gearbox 1 [1] = Gearbox 2 [2] = Gearbox 3 [3] = Gearbox 4 [4] = Gearbox 5 [5] = Gearbox 6 [6] = Gearbox 7 [7] = Gearbox 8 Dependency: Refer to: p9521 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 947 Sets the tolerance for the crosswise data comparison of the actual position between the two monitoring channels. For encoderless motion monitoring functions, the tolerance must be set to a higher value (12 degrees rotary, 1 mm linear). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 948 For an incremental encoder, the actual values are checked after referencing; for an absolute encoder, when switching on. Dependency: Refer to: C01711 Note: A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON. For linear axes, the maximum value is limited to 1 mm. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 949 SAM: Safe Acceleration Monitor (safe acceleration monitoring) SBR: Safe Brake Ramp (safe brake ramp monitoring) SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-related feedback signal from the velocity monitoring) / SGA n < nx: Safety-related output n < nx SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 950 The velocity hysteresis is effective only if the function is enabled (p9501.16 = 1). The parameter is included in the crosswise data comparison of the two monitoring channels. SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring) SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 951 Dependency: Refer to: p9501, p9542 Note: If the "actual value synchronization" is not enabled (p9501.3 = 0), then the value parameterized in p9542 is used as tolerance in the crosswise data comparison. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 952 Sets the transition time from STOP D to "Safe Operating Stop" (SOS). Note: The set time is rounded internally to an integer multiple of the monitoring clock cycle. SOS: Safe Operating Stop / SBH: Safe operating stop SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 953 Sets the time after which STO must be active when initiating the test stop. Dependency: Refer to: C01798 Note: A change only becomes effective after a POWER ON. The set time is rounded internally to an integer multiple of the monitoring clock cycle. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 954 6000.00 [rpm] 0.00 [rpm] Description: Sets the shutdown speed for the pulse suppression. Below this speed "standstill" is assumed and for STOP B / SS1, the pulses are suppressed (by changing to STOP A). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 955 In the extended sense, a bus failure should be seen here as a communication error in the control signals of the safety functions (e.g. via PROFIsafe or TM54F). SLP: Safely Limited Position / SE: Safe software limit switches SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 956 Sets the tolerance for the function "Safe motion direction" (SDI). This motion in the monitored direction is still permissible before safety message C01716 is initiated. Dependency: Refer to: p9565, p9566 Refer to: C01716 Note: SDI: Safe Direction (safe motion direction) SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 957 SBR is deactivated if the safe brake ramp falls below the set velocity limit. Note: SAM: Safe Acceleration Monitor (safe acceleration monitoring) SBR: Safe Brake Ramp (safe brake ramp monitoring) SSM: Safe Speed Monitor (safety-relevant feedback signal from the velocity monitoring) SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 958 [0D hex] Acc_mode not possible due to incorrect ID in p9570 [0F hex] Acc_mode not possible due to expired Acc_timer 172: [AC hex] Acc_mode active Dependency: Refer to: p9558, p9570 Refer to: C01799 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 959 Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting 100000 1000 Description: Sets the scaling factor to transfer the safe position via PROFIsafe in the 16-bit notation. Dependency: Refer to: r9713 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 960 (e.g. via PROFIsafe or TM54F). The main use of the wait time is the ESR function (Extended Stop and Retract). The set time is rounded internally to an integer multiple of the monitoring clock cycle. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 961 The rate of rise of the brake ramp depends upon p9581 (reference value) and p9583 (monitoring time). Dependency: Refer to: p9581, p9582 Note: The set time is rounded internally to an integer multiple of the monitoring clock cycle. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 962 The smoothing is realized with a 1st order filter. For p9587 = minimum value, the filter is deactivated. The set time is rounded internally to an integer multiple of the monitoring clock cycle. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 963 This parameter is only effective for encoderless actual value sensing (p9506/p9306 = 1, 3). For p9589 = maximum value, the filter is deactivated. Diagnostics parameter p9784 must be used to correctly set this parameter. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 964 Extended functions without selection and basic functions via onboard terminals are enabled (permissible for r9771.16 = 1). 0040 hex: Basic functions are enabled via TM54F 0041 hex: Basic functions are enabled via TM54F and basic functions via onboard terminals. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 965 P-Group: Safety Integrated Unit group: - Unit selection: - Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 Factory setting 65534 Description: Sets the PROFIsafe address for the Control Unit. Dependency: Refer to: p9810 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 966 Sets the PROFIsafe telegram number for the Control Unit. Value: No PROFIsafe telegram selected PROFIsafe standard telegram 30, PZD-1/1 PROFIsafe standard telegram 31, PZD-2/2 900: PROFIsafe SIEMENS telegram 900, PZD-2/2 901: PROFIsafe SIEMENS telegram 901, PZD-3/5 902: PROFIsafe SIEMENS telegram 902, PZD-3/6 998: Compatibility mode (as for firmware version <...
  • Page 967 Wait time switch on = drop-out time + bounce time NO contact + effect of the free-wheeling diode in the Safe Brake Adapter For index 1: Wait time switch off = response time + bounce time NC contact + effect of the free-wheeling diode in the Safe Brake Adapter SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 968 For a crosswise data comparison between p9652 and p9852, a difference of one Safety monitoring clock cycle is tolerated. The set time is rounded internally to an integer multiple of the monitoring clock cycle. SS1: Safe Stop 1 (corresponds to Stop Category 1 acc. to EN60204) SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 969 Within the parameterized time, STO must have been de-selected at least once. The monitoring time is reset each time that STO is de-selected. Dependency: Refer to: A01699 Note: STO: Safe Torque Off / SH: Safe standstill SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 970 Unit group: - Unit selection: - CU_G150_DP, Not for motor type: - Scaling: - Expert list: 1 VECTOR_G Factory setting 4294967295 Description: CRC via Node Identifier of the Control Unit. Note: CU: Control Unit SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 971 Description: CRC via the serial number of the encoder, which is used by the first monitoring channel. Note: When using an encoder without its own serial number, the value of zero is kept. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 972 [D0 hex] Start copy function SI basic parameters Note: For value = 57 hex, 2E hex and D0 hex: The value can only be set if the safety commissioning mode is set and the Safety Integrated password was entered. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 973 Setting to transfer the reference checksums from the associated actual checksums after changes (SI parameters, hardware). After transferring the reference checksums, parameters are automatically reset to zero. Value: [00 hex] Data unchanged 172: [AC hex] Acknowledge data change complete 236: [EC hex] Acknowledge hardware CRC SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 974 [0] = Encoder actual value XIst1 on CU [1] = Encoder actual value XIst1 latched for referencing [2] = XIst1 latched - reference position difference Note: The parameter is only available for Safety Integrated with encoder SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 975 [5] = Load-side additional actual value difference CU - second channel Dependency: Refer to: r9713 Note: For index 0: The display of the load-side position actual value on the Control Unit is updated in the monitoring clock cycle. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 976 Actual value > upper limit SDI negative Actual value > lower limit SDI negative Dependency: Refer to: C01711 Note: SBR: Safe Brake Ramp (safe brake ramp monitoring) SLP: Safely Limited Position SLS: Safely Limited Speed SOS: Safe Operating Stop SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 977 Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Displays the actual motor-side position actual value for the motion monitoring functions on the Control Unit. Note: The display is updated in the safety monitoring clock cycle. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 978 Displays the velocity actual values for the motion monitoring functions on the Control Unit. Index: [0] = Load-side velocity actual value on the Control Unit [1] = Actual SAM/SBR velocity limit on the Control Unit [2] = Actual SLS velocity limit on the Control Unit SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 979 Signal name 1 signal 0 signal De-select SOS/SLS (SBH/SG) De-select SOS (SBH) Select SLS (SG) bit 0 Not set Select SLS (SG) bit 1 Not set Deselect SDI positive Deselect SDI negative Deselect SLP SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 980 Deselect SS2E Note: This parameter is only supplied with actual values in the case of Safety Integrated Extended Functions. For Safety Integrated Basic Functions (SBC, SS1, STO), the value is equal to zero. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 981 2822 SP valid Safely referenced SS2E active SLP limit upper maintained 2822 SLP limit lower maintained 2822 Notice: For bit 07: The signal state behaves in an opposite way to the PROFIsafe Standard. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 982 The value indicates the clock cycle time with which each individual CDC value is compared between the two monitoring channels. Dependency: Refer to: p9500 Note: Crosswise comparison clock cycle = monitoring clock cycle (p9500) * number of data to be crosswise compared CDC: Crosswise Data Comparison SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 983 Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Displays the internal state of the user agreement. Value = 0: User agreement is not set. Value = AC hex: User agreement is set. Dependency: Refer to: p9726 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 984 This parameter is only of significance for enabled safety with encoder (otherwise "0"). Note: If the value displayed is exceeded, message C01711 is output indicating relevant subsequent faults. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 985 In the case of the two encoder system, the accuracy of the poorer encoder is displayed, based on the number of encoder pulses. Note: The parameter is only of significance for enabled safety with encoder (otherwise "0"). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 986 (internal fixed value/ Tsi) to mm/min (linear) or rpm (rotary) with Tsi = p9500 (SI Motion monitoring clock cycle). Example: For Tsi = 12 ms, r9732[0] = 5 mm/min (linear) or 1/72 rpm (rotary) is obtained. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 987 Expert list: 1 Factory setting Description: Display and BICO output for status word S_ZSW1B of the safety information channel. Bit field: Signal name 1 signal 0 signal STO active SS1 active SS2 active SOS active SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 988 SLP selected position area SLP2 SLP1 SLP selected and user agreement set SDI positive selected SDI neg selected Test stop active Test stop required Reference position required Reference trigger command identified or reference position valid SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 989 8 r9747[56], r9748[56], r9749[56], r9753[56], r9754[56], r9755[56], r9756[56] --> 7th acknowledged message case, safety message 1 r9747[63], r9748[63], r9749[63], r9753[63], r9754[63], r9755[63], r9756[63] --> 7th acknowledged message case, safety message 8 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 990 Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 1, 0, 1, 1 --> PROFIdrive message class 11: incorrect position actual value/speed actual value or not available Bits 20, 19, 18, 17, 16 = 0, 1, 1, 0, 0 --> PROFIdrive message class 12: internal (DRIVE-CLiQ) communication error SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 991 Factory setting - [ms] - [ms] - [ms] Description: Displays the relative system runtime in milliseconds when the safety message was removed. Dependency: Refer to: r9744, r9747, r9748, r9749, p9752, r9753, r9754, r9756 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 992 Refer to: p9762 Note: The new password entered into p9762 must be re-entered in order to acknowledge. p9762 = p9763 = 0 is automatically set after the new Safety Integrated password has been successfully acknowledged. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 993 [4] = PZD 5 [5] = PZD 6 [6] = PZD 7 [7] = PZD 8 Dependency: Refer to: r9768 Note: The PROFIsafe trailer at the end of the telegram is also displayed (2 words). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 994 STOP B for PROFIsafe failure supported SBR with encoder and SS2E supported Dependency: Refer to: r9871 Note: CU: Control Unit ESR: Extended Stop and Retract SBC: Safe Brake Control SBR: Safe Brake Ramp (safe brake ramp monitoring) SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 995 - For p9772.1 = 1 and p9772.19 = 1, safe pulse cancellation is active, if safety functions without selection are activated via p9601.2/p9801.2 = 1 and p9601.5/p9801.5 = 1. Note: If p9601.0 = 1 and p9601.2 = 1 and p9801.5 = 1 then for bit 0 and 1, the STO function applies. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 996 A group is formed by appropriately grouping the terminals for the function "Safe Torque Off" (STO). The status of a group of n drives is, for drives 1 to n - 1 displayed with a delay of one monitoring clock cycle; this is a system-related effect. SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 997 Safety functions (basic functions or extended functions) have been enabled and are active. For bit 02 = 1: A safety-relevant component has been replaced. Data save required (p0977 = 1 or p0971 = 1 or "copy RAM to ROM"). SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 998 Index: [0] = SI time stamp for checksum to track functional changes [1] = SI time stamp for checksum to track hardware-specific changes Dependency: Refer to: p9601, p9729, p9799 Refer to: F01690 SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 999 [1] = Actual acceleration value Dependency: Refer to: p9589 Note: For index 0: Shows the parameterized acceleration value of p9589. For index 1: Shows the actually measured acceleration values of the encoderless actual value sensing SINAMICS G130/G150 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 1000 The actual velocity has a deviation of +/- r9787 for 6 ms * p9585/p9385 within a monitoring time of 1 s. Dependency: Refer to: p9585 Note: For linear axes, the following unit applies: millimeters per minute For rotary axes, the following unit applies: revolutions per minute SINAMICS G130/G150 1000 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...
  • Page 1001 = 1 (monitoring clock cycle) r9794[1] = 2 (enable safety functions) r9794[2] = 3 (F-DI changeover, tolerance time) A complete list of numbers for crosswise-compared data items appears in fault F01611. SINAMICS G130/G150 1001 List Manual (LH2), 07/2016, A5E03263479A...

This manual is also suitable for:

SinamicsG150

Table of Contents